Next Level Baker

menu icon
go to homepage
  • Recipes
  • Contact
  • About
  • Privacy Policy
  • Subscribe
subscribe
search icon
Homepage link
  • Recipes
  • Contact
  • About
  • Privacy Policy
  • Subscribe
×
Home

Easy Cranberry Brie Crostini

September 18, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 6 Comments

Cranberry brie crostini bites with pistachios are a quick and elegant appetizer that always impresses. Crisp toasted baguette slices are topped with sweet and tangy cranberry sauce, creamy brie slices and a sprinkle of crunchy pistachios. They are easy to assemble and perfect for get togethers.

Overhead close up photo of cranberry brie crostini on a serving platter

Cranberry sauce may be a holiday classic, but it doesn't have to be just a side dish. Whip up a double batch of homemade Grand Marnier cranberry sauce and you've got options. Save half for your holiday dinner, then use the rest to make these festive cranberry brie crostini bites as an appetizer. All it takes is a few additional ingredients...a baguette, a little brie, and a sprinkle of pistachios for an appetizer that feels like it was made to match the meal. Or maybe you have leftover cranberry sauce? Don't toss it! Use it for these irresistible bites and watch them disappear fast.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make cranberry brie crostini: baguette, brie, cranberry sauce and pistachios
  • Baguette
  • Olive Oil
  • Cranberry sauce (homemade or store bought)
  • Brie
  • Salted pistachios

See recipe card for quantities.

Overhead close up photo of cranberry brie crostini topped with chopped pistachios on a serving platter

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - to make this recipe gluten free, use a gluten free baguette.
  • Vegan - to make his recipe vegan, use a vegan baguette and a plant based brie.
  • Pistachios - I highly recommend salted, roasted pistachios. That little salt adds a nice touch. You can use unsalted pistachios or even a different type of nut. Both pecans and walnuts would work well too.
  • Cranberry sauce - you don't have to make homemade cranberry sauce, you can use canned sauce from the store. The holidays are busy, we get it.

Equipment

You'll need an oven, toaster oven or air fryer to make the crostini toasts.

Storage

If you have any leftover cranberry brie crostini bites, you can store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator overnight. The bread will lose its crispness even overnight though.

Cranberry brie crostini on a small plate in front of another small plate with cranberry brie crostini and a serving platter with cranberry brie crostini

Next Level Tips

  • You can warm the brie for this appetizer, however there's such a short window between warmed brie and melted, runny brie. In the U.S., everyone seems to want to melt brie. But we lived in Europe for 4 years, and the most common way to eat brie was room temperature with bread. Room temperature brie really allows the flavor to shine.
  • Brie can be tricky to cut because it's a soft cheese. A cheese knife with holes is the best knife to use since it prevents sticking. But you can also use a sharp, thin knife. If you're still struggling you can also heat the knife blade with hot water, wipe it dry and then slice.

FAQ

What's the difference between crostini and bruschetta?

Bruschetta is usually made with a large, rustic bread and then rubbed with garlic and topped with fresh ingredients. Crostini are smaller toasted slices, often from a baguette, that can hold cheese or a variety of other toppings. They are bite sized and often a bit more fancy, making them perfect for parties. It's becoming more common to slice bruschetta, like in my Caprese bruschetta or smoked salmon bruschetta recipes. If you want to use that type of bread, do it! You'll just have to cut the brie slices accordingly.

Very close up view of cranberry brie crostini on a black board

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead view of caprese bruschetta with olive oil and balsamic cream drizzle on a serving plate
    Caprese Bruschetta
  • Overhead close up view of sliced smoked salmon bruschetta pieces on a cutting board
    Smoked Salmon Bruschetta
  • Whipped Ricotta Truffle Oil Dip
    White Truffle Garlic Bread with Whipped Ricotta
  • Overhead close up photo of a stack of grilled garlic bread with nice grill char marks and garnished with extra salt and fresh parsley on a serving plate
    Grilled Garlic Bread
Overhead close up photo of cranberry brie crostini on a serving platter

Easy Cranberry Brie Crostini

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Cranberry brie crostini with pistachios is an elegant appetizer that is quick and easy to assemble. Slices of creamy brie sit on top of sweet and tangy cranberry sauce on crisp toasted baguette, finished with a sprinkle of crunchy pistachios. They are perfect for effortless entertaining.
5 from 1 vote
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 8 minutes mins
Total Time 23 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 12

Ingredients
  

  • 1 baguette
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 8 ounces brie cheese
  • 2 cups cranberry sauce homemade or store bought
  • ½ cup salted pistachios rough chopped

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the oven to 400 ℉. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or a baking mat.
  • Slice the baguette into ½ to ¾ inch slices. Lightly brush each side of the baguette slices with olive oil. Place in a single layer on the baking sheet. Bake for 8 minutes, flipping over half way. Allow to cool.
  • Spread a layer of cranberry sauce onto each slice.
  • Slice the brie cheese into pieces slightly smaller than the baguette slices. Layer the brie cheese on top of the cranberry sauce.
  • Rough chop the pistachios. Sprinkle them on top of the brie and lightly press down. Serve and enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Cranberry Brie Crostini
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Very close up view of cranberry brie crostini on a black board with title overlays for Cranberry Brie Crostini and www.nextlevelbaker.com

Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce

September 15, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 2 Comments

Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce is a Thanksgiving classic with a little extra flair. Fresh cranberries cook down with orange juice and Grand Marnier for a sauce that's tangy, sweet and full of fresh flavor. The citrus gives it a bright pop, while the Grand Marnier adds a cozy depth that makes it feel a bit more elevated. It's an easy upgrade that takes your holiday table up a notch.

Overhead view of a bowl of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick with a spoon sticking out and surrounded by some scattered fresh cranberries

I grew up with canned cranberry sauce at Thanksgiving. I'm not even sure anyone liked it, yet it was always on the table. But once I was old enough to make homemade cranberry sauce, I gave it a try and never looked back. And watching cranberries burst as they simmer is surprisingly fun. Cranberry sauce is truly a Thanksgiving classic, but it deserves to be more than just a canned afterthought. Fresh cranberries with a touch of citrus and Grand Marnier take cranberry sauce to a whole new delicious level. Sure, stuffing and mashed potatoes will probably still be everyone's favorite side dishes. But maybe, this year, an elevated cranberry sauce might just move up a few spots.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients need to make Grand Mainer Cranberry Sauce: fresh or frozen cranberries, Grand Mariner, water, oranges, white sugar and a cinnamon stick
  • Fresh or frozen cranberries
  • Grand Marnier
  • Oranges or orange juice
  • Water
  • White sugar
  • Cinnamon stick

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions

Cranberries and a cinnamon stick in a pot covered with water, orange juice and Grand Marnier

Step 1: Bring the water, orange juice, ¼ cup of Grand Marnier and sugar to a boil. Add the cranberries and the cinnamon stick and return to a boil. 

Cranberries simmering in a pot as the berries are starting to burst

Step 2: Reduce to a simmer. The cranberries will start to burst, and the sauce will start to thicken.

Cranberries simmering in a pot as most of the berries have burst and the sauce has thickened

Step 3: Continue simmering until most of the cranberries have burst and the sauce has thickened. Then remove the pan from the heat and remove the cinnamon stick from the pan. The sauce will continue to thicken as it cools. Cool to room temperature and then refrigerate for 2 hours before serving.

Overhead view of a bowl of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick surrounded by some scattered fresh cranberries and a polish pottery bowl in the background

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - this cranberry sauce is naturally gluten free, so no substitutions are needed. 
  • Vegan - this cranberry sauce recipe is naturally vegan, so no substitutions are needed.
  • Cinnamon stick - you can substitute ground cinnamon for the cinnamon stick. Substitute ¼ teaspoon of high quality strong cinnamon or ½ teaspoon of regular, grocery store cinnamon for the cinnamon stick. 
  • Orange juice - if you have concentrated or not from concentrate orange juice on hand, you could use that in place of fresh squeezed orange juice. 
  • Grand Marnier - you could substitute Cointreau, Triple Sec or Curacao for the Grand Marnier as they are all orange flavored liqueurs. For non-orange flavored liqueurs, you could substitute cognac or brandy as Grand Marnier is a type of cognac. And finally, you could use bourbon. Bourbon is my favorite all purpose hard liquor for cooking as it has sweet, vanilla and caramel notes. Try my Bourbon Sweet Potatoes for a yummy Thanksgiving side dish made with bourbon. For a alcohol free version, replace with Grand Marnier with half orange juice and half water.

Equipment

A sauce pan on a stove or hot plate is the only equipment needed to make this recipe.

Close up view of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick

Storage

Store the cranberry sauce in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 to 7 days. 

Next Level Tips

  • I grew up up with canned cranberry sauce. But homemade cranberry sauce is easy and worth the effort! It tastes so, so much better than canned cranberry sauce.
  • The historic ratios for homemade cranberry sauce are one fresh bag of cranberries, 1 cup of water and 1 cup of sugar. I'm pretty sure that's always been the recipe on the side of the bag. I've reduced the sugar, because that recipe has always been a bit too sweet. You could even go down to ½ cup sugar. 
  • We simmer the cranberries in the Grand Marnier, water and orange juice so that most of the alcohol of the Grand Marnier will cook off and we'll be left with just the added flavor depth. If you want a stronger Grand Marnier flavor, you can add another tablespoon at the end after you remove the cranberries from the heat. 
  • To reduce the stress of cooking on Thanksgiving day, this is a great recipe to make a day or two ahead of time. 
  • Make a double batch and serve half as a side and use the other half to make an easy cranberry brie crostini appetizer!
Overhead view of a bowl of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick surrounded by some scattered fresh cranberries and a spoon on a spoon rest

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce:

  • Bowl of Gluten Free Sausage Stuffing
    Gluten Free Sausage Stuffing
  • Close up photo of bourbon sweet potatoes in a crockpot insert
    Bourbon Sweet Potatoes
  • Close up photo of a bowl of garlic mashed potatoes
    Make Ahead Garlic Mashed Potatoes
  • Individual slice of pumpkin cheesecake with whipped topping in shape of a rosette
    Pumpkin Spice Cheesecake
Overhead view of a bowl of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick

Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Grand Marnier cranberry sauce is a holiday classic with a twist. Fresh cranberries simmer with orange juice and Grand Marnier for a sweet and tart sauce with citrus brightness and a hint of warmth from the cinnamon.
5 from 1 vote
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Cooling time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time 2 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Servings 8

Ingredients
  

  • 12 ounces fresh or frozen* cranberries
  • ½ cup water
  • ¼ cup orange juice fresh squeezed
  • ¼ cup Grand Marnier
  • ¾ cup white sugar
  • 1 cinnamon stick

Instructions
 

  • In a medium sauce pan, bring the water, orange juice, Grand Marnier and the sugar to a boil and stir until the sugar has dissolved.
  • Add the fresh or frozen* cranberries and the cinnamon stick to the sauce pan. Return to a boil, and then reduce to a simmer. Continue to simmer until most of the cranberries have burst and the sauce has thickened, about 8-12 minutes.
  • Remove the pan from the heat, and remove the cinnamon stick from the pan. Poor the sauce into a serving bowl. The sauce will continue to thicken as it cools.
  • Once the sauce is at room temperature, cover and refrigerate for 2 hours before serving.

Notes

*Frozen cranberries do hot have to be thawed but may take longer to burst. 

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Cranberry Sauce, Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a partial bowl of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick with a spoon sticking out and surrounded by some scattered fresh cranberries with a title overlay that says Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce and www.nextlevelbaker.com

White Chocolate Raspberry Bundt Cake

September 8, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 6 Comments

White chocolate raspberry bundt cake is the kind of dessert that looks fancy but is surprisingly easy to pull together. The soft, tender cake blends tart raspberries and pockets of creamy white chocolate for a flavor combination that feels indulgent yet still balanced. Topped with a white chocolate buttercream, it's a showstopper for holidays, birthdays or anytime you want a cake that impresses without all the fuss.

Overhead view of a slice of white chocolate raspberry bundt cake next to a partial view of the rest of the cake

This is not a copycat Nothing Bundt Cake recipe. There's no cake mix and no raspberry jam or preserves. This is a different version with cake made from scratch using fresh and frozen raspberries. Familiar, but just a little different. I get it, raspberries can be expensive in the store. But, raspberry preserves are expensive too, and the flavor burst of real raspberries is undeniably worth it. Maybe you're a lucky one with raspberries growing in the garden? If so, I'm jealous. Raspberries straight from the garden are the absolute best and would work perfectly in this cake.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Cake Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make white chocolate raspberry bundt cake: cake flour, white sugar, milk, sour cream, eggs, frozen raspberries, white chocolate, salted butter, baking powder, vanilla, salt.
  • Cake flour
  • Baking powder
  • Salt
  • Salted butter
  • White sugar
  • Eggs
  • Vanilla
  • Whole milk
  • Full fat sour cream
  • White chocolate
  • Frozen raspberries

See recipe card for quantities.

Frosting Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make white chocolate buttercream frosting: salted butter, white chocolate, powdered sugar, heaving whipping cream, salt and fresh raspberries for garnish.
  • Salted butter
  • White chocolate
  • Powdered sugar
  • Heavy shipping cream
  • Salt
  • Fresh raspberries (optional)

See recipe card for quantities.

Substitutions

  • Cake flour - No cake flour? Use 3 cups of all purpose flour, remove 6 tablespoons, and replace with 6 tablespoons cornstarch. However, cake flour gives the a lighter and more tender texture.
  • Buttercream frosting - If you would rather use a cream cheese frosting, you can use the cream cheese frosting from my carrot cake recipe.

Variations

  • Classic chocolate - classic chocolate also pairs very will with raspberries. If you want to use regular chocolate, you can substitute semi sweet chocolate chips or chocolate bar (50-60% chocolate) in the cake. For the frosting, you can use the chocolate frosting from my chocolate zucchini cake recipe which uses cocoa powder in the frosting.
Overhead view of a white chocolate raspberry bundt cake with white chocolate buttercream frosting and fresh raspberries with a slice cut out and on its side

Equipment

A hand mixer or stand mixer is helpful for mixing the cake and especially helpful for mixing the white chocolate buttercream frosting.

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-5 days,

Next Level Tips

  • If you want to pipe the frosting, use your favorite tip. For the white chocolate raspberry cake in the photos, I used an Ateco #10 piping tip.
  • The fresh raspberries and sprinkled powdered sugar on top are optional, but it makes the cake pretty. The fresh raspberries also give a clue to the overall can flavor of the cake which is nice if the cake is sitting out on a dessert table.
Overhead partial view of a white chocolate raspberry bundt cake with white chocolate buttercream frosting and fresh raspberries with a slice cut out and on its side

FAQ

Can I use white chocolate chips instead?

Yes, you can use white chocolate chips. The biggest different between white chocolate bars and white chocolate chips are that white chocolate chips contain stabilizers that help them hold their shape. Regular white chocolate tends to melt more naturally. Often, white chocolate chips can be expensive too. I can usually get two white chocolate bars at Aldi for less than the price of one bag of white chocolate chips, and they taste better too.

Can I use fresh raspberries in the cake?

Yes, you can use fresh raspberries in the cake. However, if you have extra fresh raspberries from the garden, you can always pop some of them in the freezer as well. I prefer to use frozen raspberries in desserts that are baked as frozen raspberries are less fragile than fresh raspberries.

Do I have to use whole milk and full fat sour cream?

You can use lower fat versions, but I highly recommend using whole milk and full fat sour cream.

An overhead view of two plates, each with a slice of white chocolate raspberry bundt cake

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Top view of a chocolate bundt cake topped with powdered sugar
    Chocolate Bundt Cake
  • Close up photo of a slice of chocolate zucchini cake with chocolate buttercream frosting.
    Easy Chocolate Zucchini Cake
  • Close up side view of carrot cake
    Single Layer Carrot Cake (No Nuts)
Overhead view of a white chocolate raspberry bundt cake with white chocolate buttercream frosting and fresh raspberries with a slice cut out and on its side

White Chocolate Raspberry Bundt Cake

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
White chocolate raspberry bundt cake is elegant yet easy to make, with tender cake, juicy raspberries and creamy white chocolate in every bite. Finished with a white chocolate buttercream, it's the perfect centerpiece for holidays, birthdays or any celebration.
5 from 2 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 55 minutes mins
Cooling and Frosting time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
Total Time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 16

Ingredients
  

Cake ingredients

  • 3 cups cake flour
  • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ cup salted butter softened
  • 1 ½ cups white sugar
  • 2 large eggs + 2 egg whites
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla
  • 1 cup whole milk
  • 1 cup full fat sour cream
  • 4.4 ounces white chocolate (about ¾ cup) rough chopped
  • 1 cup frozen raspberries

Frosting ingredients

  • 1 cup salted butter softened
  • 4.4 ounces white chocolate (about ¾ cup) melted
  • 4 cups powdered sugar
  • ⅛ teaspoon salt
  • 2-3 tablespoons heavy whipping cream
  • fresh raspberries for garnish optional
  • powdered sugar optional

Instructions
 

Cake instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350℉ and spray the bundt pan with cooking spray.
  • Add the cake flour, baking powder and salt to a small bowl. Mix well and set aside.
  • Add the butter and the white sugar into a mixing bowl and mix on medium until combined.
  • Add the eggs, egg whites and vanilla to the mixing bowl and mix on medium just until combined.
  • Add the whole milk and sour cream to the mixing bowl and mix on medium just until combined.
  • Add the cake flour mixture to the mixing bowl and mix on medium just until combined.
  • Fold in the white chocolate chunks and frozen raspberries until they are evenly distributed.
  • Pour the cake batter into the bundt pan. Twist the pan back and forth to even out the batter. Bake for 50-60 minutes until the cake is golden brown, is pulling away from the sides and springs back when touched.
  • Cool on a cooling rack. Wait until cool (or a minimum of at least 30 minutes) and invert onto a serving plate or cake round.

Frosting Instructions

  • Wait until the cake is fully cooled before frosting it.
  • Heat the white chocolate in the microwave for 30 seconds. Stir. If not fully melted after stirring, heat in 15 second increments until melted. Set aside to cool.
  • Add the butter and cooled melted chocolate to a mixing bowl and mix on medium until combined and fluffy.
  • Add the powdered sugar, salt and 2 tablespoons of heavy whipping cream to the mixing bowl and mix on medium high until the frosting comes together and then becomes light and fluffy, approximately 3-4 minutes. Scrape down the sides as needed. If the frosting is too thick, mix in an additional tablespoon of heavy whipping cream.
  • Pipe the frosting on the cake or spread it on with an icing spatula. Top with fresh raspberries and a sprinkle of powdered sugar.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword White Chocolate Raspberry Bundt Cake
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a slice of white chocolate raspberry bundt cake next to a partial view of the rest of the cake

Mexican Street Corn Dip (Elotes Style)

September 6, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Inspired by Mexico's famous elote street corn, this Mexican Street Corn Dip packs all the bold, tangy flavors of elotes into a warm and cheesy appetizer. Roasted corn, crema, lime, cotija cheese and a touch of Tajin come together to create a flavorful, creamy dip that's impossible to resist. Serve it with tortilla chips and you've got a crowd pleasing dip that will disappear fast.

Overhead view of a bowl of Mexican Street Corn dip garnished with cilantro

Sweet corn on the cob is a summer favorite, but it's not always in season. It's also more time consuming to use if you're just going to cut it off the cob anyway for an appetizer. So fire roasted corn is a great alternative to use in this Mexican street corn dip. It gives you that same smoky sweet flavor without any extra work. Stir it together with Mexican crema, Cotija, lime, Tajín and you've got a dip so good you might just skip the chips and eat it straight with a spoon. But, at that point, I'd just call it a side dish. So this dip works great as a side dish too!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Overhead view of ingredients needed to make Mexican Street Corn Dip: fire roasted sweet corn, Crema, Cotija, cilantro, jalapeño, lime, garlic and Tajin.
  • Sweet corn (on the cob, frozen or canned)
  • Mexican crema
  • Garlic
  • Jalapeno
  • Lime
  • Cotija cheese
  • Cilantro
  • Tajin

See recipe card for quantities.

Elotes vs. Esquites

Elotes are corn on the cob, usually boiled or grilled, and topped with Mexican crema, cotija cheese, lime and chili powder or Tajín. Esquites are cooked corn kernels, often sautéed or simmered, with similar toppings and served in a cup rather than on the cob. Both are very popular Mexican street foods that are gaining in popularity in the U.S. too. This dip captures the best of both, combining the flavors of elotes and esquites in a creamy, shareable dip.

Overhead view of a bowl of Mexican Street Corn dip garnished with cilantro with tortilla chips

Substitutions

  • Mexican Crema - I strongly suggest trying Mexican Crema. It has a unique flavor that's similar to but not quite sour cream, and the consistency is a mix between sour cream and mayo. But if you don't want to buy Mexican Cream or can't find it, you could substitute a mix of half sour cream and half mayonnaise.
  • Cotija - You could substitute Feta for the cotija cheese as Feta is also tangy and crumbly.
  • Tajin - I like using classic Tajin with lime. But if you already know you want an extra spicy version, you can use a spicier version of Tajin or straight red chili powder

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator forum to 3 to 4 days.

Overhead view of a bowl of Mexican Street Corn dip garnished with cilantro with tortilla chips

Next Level Tips

  • To make a creamier dip, you can double the amount of Mexican crema to 1 cup instead of ½ cup.
  • I'm not going to lie, I eat leftover Mexican street corn dip with a spoon. This dip would also make a good side dish.
  • The garlic and jalapeño are optional as they're not typically used in elotes street corn, but they're quick additions and add another layer of flavor. Try them!

FAQ

What is Mexican Crema?

Mexican crema is a smooth, slightly tangy cream similar to sour cream, but it has a thinner consistency and a richer flavor. It's often drizzled over tacos, enchiladas, soups and roasted vegetables and slathered over elotes and esquites to add a cool, creamy finish that balances spicy or bold dishes.

What is Cotija Cheese?

Cotija cheese is a crumbly Mexican cheese made with a salty, tangy flavor that intensifies as it ages. It's commonly sprinkled over tacos, elotes, esquites, beans and salads. It adds a savory punch and a delicious texture.

Mexican street dip on tortilla chips on a plate in front of a bowl of Mexican street corn dip

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Bowl of cilantro chimichurri with a spoon sticking out in front of fresh cilantro
    Cilantro Chimichurri
  • Overhead photo of a steak and rice bowl made with steak bites, rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, cherry tomatoes and chimichurri sauce.
    Southwestern Steak and Rice Bowl with Cilantro Chimichurri
  • Overhead photo of a small sauce cup of avocado lime crema next to avocado lime crema drizzled on a plate in zig zag lines
    Avocado Lime Crema
  • A bowl of guacamole with a chip sticking out surrounded by chips on a plate
    Easy 4-Ingredient Guacamole Recipe
Overhead view of a bowl of Mexican Street Corn dip garnished with cilantro surrounded by tortilla chips

Mexican Street Corn Dip (Elotes)

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Mexican Street Corn Dip brings the bold, tangy flavors of elotes into a creamy, cheesy dip that's perfect for sharing. Roasted corn, cotija cheese, lime, Mexican crema, and Tajin create a rich, zesty bite that pairs perfectly with tortilla chips.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 6 minutes mins
Total Time 16 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 6

Ingredients
  

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ jalapeno minced, optional
  • 2 cloves garlic minced, optional
  • 1 12 ounce bag frozen fire roasted corn
  • ½ cup Mexican crema
  • ¼ cup cotija cheese crumbled
  • ½ of a lime, juiced
  • 2 packed tablespoons cilantro finely chopped
  • 2 teaspoons Tajin Clasico

Instructions
 

  • Mince the garlic and jalapeño. For a spicier dip, leave in the jalapeño seeds.
  • Heat one tablespoon of olive oil in medium skillet over medium high heat. Add the minced garlic and jalapeño and sauté for 1 minute, stirring.
  • Add the frozen corn and heat until corn is hot, 3-5 minutes. Stir occasionally.
  • Add the cooked corn to a medium bowl. Reserve some cotija, cilantro and Tajin for garnish. Add the rest of the cotija, cilantro and Tajin plus the crema and the lime juice to the bowl and stir until combined. Garnish with the set aside cotija, cilantro and/or Tajin.
  • Serve warm, or at room temperature, with tortilla chips.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Mexican Street Corn dip
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Bowl of Mexican Street Corn dip garnished with cilantro next to tortilla chips

Southwestern Steak and Rice Bowl with Cilantro Chimichurri

August 30, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

A Southwestern steak and rice bowl is made up of juicy steak bites with fluffy rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, tomatoes and chimichurri sauce for a fresh, colorful bowl. The mix of tender vegetables and creamy avocado balances the hearty steak in every bite. A generous drizzle of cilantro chimichurri adds a zesty, herby finish that pulls the whole dish together.

Overhead photo of a steak and rice bowl made with steak bites, rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, cherry tomatoes and chimichurri sauce.

Cilantro is one of my favorite herbs of all time. And my daughter is one of those people who think it tastes like soap. I feel like she's missing out on something truly special. She doesn't see it that way, because how would she know? Apparently, whether cilantro has a soapy taste is genetic, which just blows my mind. I' know she didn't get that gene from me! But I assume, since you've read this far, that you also love cilantro? I put fresh cilantro on everything. Everything! And cilantro chimichurri takes the amazing flavor of fresh cilantro to a while new level, if you can imagine that. It only takes 5 minutes and it turns regular steak bites, vegetables and rice into an incredibly delicious dish. Don't skip the cilantro chimichurri on these Southwestern steak and rice bowls.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make a steak and rice bowl: steak, white rice, zucchini, avocado, corn, cherry tomatoes, chimichurri sauce and salt.
  • White rice
  • One pound steak
  • Corn (frozen or canned)
  • Zucchini
  • Acocado
  • Cherry, grape or sweetheart tomatoes
  • Salt
  • Olive oil
  • Cilantro chimichurri sauce

See recipe card for quantities.

Close up view of cilantro chimichurri over steak in a rice bowl with corn, zucchini, avocado and cherry tomatoes

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - this recipe is naturally gluten free, so no adjustments are necessary.
  • Cilantro chimichurri - if you don't like cilantro, you can use parsley for a more traditional chimichurri. You could also substitute chipotle almond dip (which can be thinned down by mixing in water) or a jalapeño crema. Jalapeño crema has some cilantro, but it's not dominated by cilantro like cilantro chimichurri.
  • Steak - you can always substitute chicken or shrimp for the steak. To make a vegan bowl, you could substitute sweet potato cubes or grilled vegetables for the steak bites.
  • Corn - I prefer the taste of fresh corn on the cob or frozen fire roasted corn. But you can also make the corn step easier by using canned corn or frozen steamer bags of corn.
  • Rice - you can substitute brown rice or wild rice for the white rice. However, the water amounts and cooking times will vary depending upon the type of rice. You could also substitute microwaveable rice packets, couscous or quinoa.

Storage

Store any leftover steak and rice bowls in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days. It's best to store any avocado separately with an extra splash of lime juice.

Overhead photo of a steak and rice bowl made with steak bites, rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, cherry tomatoes and chimichurri sauce.

Next Level Tips

  • You can also grill or pan sear a whole steak and slice it for the rice bowl. However, sliced steak ends up in pieces that are too large for a bowl, which is why we cut it into cubes. Cubed steak makes it easy to get both steak and veggies on the same fork, giving you the perfect bite every time.
  • If you want to use the cilantro rice from my shrimp burrito bowl, that's an option. However, for this recipe, you can also just add more cilantro chimichurri to the rice if you want and save yourself a step!

FAQ

What type of steak should I use?

I always start by looking for what's on special. Then look for a medium thickness, something that could easily be cut into cubes. Usually sirloins or New York strips fit into those categories. Ribeyes are super tasty, but they are often expensive and too thick. If you don't like to cut steak, your grocery store may even sell pre-cut cubes.

Overhead photo of a steak and rice bowl made with steak bites, rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, cherry tomatoes and chimichurri sauce.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Bowl of cilantro chimichurri with a spoon sticking out in front of fresh cilantro
    Cilantro Chimichurri
  • Close Up of Chipotle Almond Dip
    Chipotle Almond Dip
  • Overhead photo of a small sauce cup of avocado lime crema next to avocado lime crema drizzled on a plate in zig zag lines
    Avocado Lime Crema
  • A bowl of guacamole with a chip sticking out surrounded by chips on a plate
    Easy 4-Ingredient Guacamole Recipe
Overhead photo of a steak and rice bowl made with steak bites, rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, cherry tomatoes and chimichurri sauce.

Steak and Rice Bowl with Cilantro Chimichurri

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Juicy steak bites are paired with fluffy rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, and tomatoes for a fresh, colorful Southwestern bowl. A drizzle of zesty cilantro chimichurri ties the flavors together for a bright, herby finish.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 30 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 50 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 2

Ingredients
  

  • 1 cup long grain rice like jasmine or basmati
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 pound steak
  • 1 medium to large zucchini sliced in half moons
  • 1 medium to large avocado diced
  • 2 cups frozen fire roasted corn
  • 1 cup small grape or cherry tomatoes halved
  • 4 tablespoons cilantro chimichurri
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Instructions
 

  • Remove the steak from the refrigerator and let it rest for 30 minutes.
  • Make the chimichurri sauce and set it aside.
  • Cook the rice in a rice cooker or Instant Pot using 1 cup of rice and 1 ½ cups of water. If using an Instant Pot, select the Rice or White Rice setting.
  • Dice tomatoes and avocados and place on two separate bowls (or plates). Slice the zucchini in half moons and set aside.
  • Cut the steak into 1 and ½ inch cubes. Pat dry and season well with salt and optional pepper.
  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a medium skillet over medium high heat. Add the frozen corn and cook until hot, stirring occasionally, about 3-4 minutes. Divide the corn between the two plates.
  • In the same skillet, add 1 tablespoon of olive oil and cook the zucchini over medium high heat. After the bottoms have started to brown, flip and cook the other side. It should take 3-4 minutes in total. The zucchini should be tender but still firm. Split the zucchini between the two plates.
  • Meanwhile, heat a medium or large skillet (cast iron preferred) over medium heat. Add 1 tablespoon of olive oil and the steak bites in a single layer. Sear for 3 minutes, flip, and cook another 2-3 minutes or until all sides are browned and the internal temperature reaches 140-145℉ for medium.
  • Divide the steak bites and cooked rice between the bowls/plates, then top each dish with 2 tablespoons of chimichurri.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Steak and Rice Bowl
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Close up view of cilantro chimichurri over steak in a rice bowl with corn, zucchini, avocado and cherry tomatoes

Cilantro Chimichurri

August 30, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Cilantro chimichurri is a vibrant, flavorful sauce made with fresh cilantro, avocado oil, lime juice, garlic and spices. It has a bright, zesty taste with just the right amount of heat. Use it to quickly elevate steak, chicken, salads, grilled vegetables or grain bowls with fresh, bold flavor.

Bowl of cilantro chimichurri with a spoon sticking out in front of fresh cilantro

Chimichurri first originated in Argentina and Uruguay, where it was made with parsley as a go to sauce for grilled meats. While parsley is the classic herb for chimichurri, I've always preferred the bold, fresh flavor of cilantro. That love for cilantro is what inspired this version. Cilantro is the herb I reach for anytime I'm making a southwestern steak and rice bowl, grilling meats or vegetables that need a quick sauce, or tossing together a fresh salad that needs a tasty but easy dressing.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make chimichurri sauce: fresh cilantro, avocado oil, lime, garlic, Mexican oregano, cumin, crushed red pepper and salt.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Avocado oil
  • Lime juice
  • Garlic
  • Mexican oregano
  • Crushed red pepper flakes
  • Cumin
  • Salt

See recipe card for quantities.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - cilantro chimichurri is naturally gluten free, so it needs no substitutions.
  • Avocado oil - if you don't have avocado oil, use another neutral oil that words well in sauces and dressings like grapeseed oil. You can also use olive oil like in traditional chimichurri sauce, but olive oil is not neutral.
  • Lime juice - traditional chimichurri used red wine vinegar. If you want to substitute a vinegar for the lime juice acid component of this sauce, I recommend rice wine vinegar or white wine vinegar which are better suited for the Southwestern flavor profile of this sauce.
  • Mexican oregano - if you can't find Mexican oregano, you can substitute regular Italian oregano. It's not a perfect substitution, so you can also leave it out.
  • Crushed red pepper flakes- traditional chimichurri uses crushed red pepper for some heat. Crushed red pepper flakes also works well with cilantro chimichurri. But if you are out, you can substitute cayenne pepper or red chili powder (the pure kind, not the kind used for tacos). But reduce the amount to â…› teaspoon of cayenne pepper or pure red chili powder to start.

Storage

Store any leftover cilantro chimichurri in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. You can also freeze cilantro chimichurri for future use for up to 2 months.

Close up view of cilantro chimichurri over steak in a rice bowl with corn, zucchini, avocado and cherry tomatoes

Next Level Tips

  • Cilantro chimichurri is the perfect sauce for southwestern steak and rice bowls, salads or any dish that needs a little extra flavor. It's quick and also versatile. Win-win.
  • I highly recommend giving Mexican oregano a try. You can find it online, in grocery stores that have a large spice section or in grocery stores that have an international spice section. Its flavor profile matches better with cilantro, and it's often a lot less expensive than Italian oregano as well.
  • This recipe calls for ½ cup of cilantro, which is actually a lot of cilantro. Depending on the the size of the bunch, it may end up to be the entire cilantro bunch!

FAQ

What is Mexican Oregano?

Mexican oregano is not the same as Italian oregano. Mexican oregano comes from the verbena family and is bolder with a more citrusy flavor. Italian oregano comes from the mint family and is milder and more peppery. I strongly recommend using Mexican oregano for cilantro chimichurri and recipes like homemade taco seasoning. The flavor of Mexican oregano is more complimentary with the flavor of cilantro.

Bowl of cilantro chimichurri with a spoon sticking out in front of fresh cilantro

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead photo of a steak and rice bowl made with steak bites, rice, zucchini, corn, avocado, cherry tomatoes and chimichurri sauce.
    Southwestern Steak and Rice Bowl with Cilantro Chimichurri
  • Close Up of Chipotle Almond Dip
    Chipotle Almond Dip
  • Overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.
    Southwestern Cobb Salad
  • Overhead view of white plate with a shrimp burrito bowl made with seasoned shrimp, cilantro rice, black beans, diced avocado, cherry tomatoes, and corn garnished with cilantro and chipotle almond drizzle. Additional chipotle almond dressing, tortilla chips, a napkin and a fork surround the plate.
    Shrimp Burrito Bowls
Bowl of cilantro chimichurri with a spoon sticking out in front of fresh cilantro

Cilantro Chimichurri

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Cilantro chimichurri blends fresh cilantro, avocado oil, lime juice, garlic and spices to create a bright, zesty sauce. And it has just the right amount of spice to elevate any dish. Drizzle it over steak, chicken, salads or grain bowls for a fresh flavor boost.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Total Time 5 minutes mins
Course Sauce
Cuisine American, Mexican

Ingredients
  

  • ½ cup cilantro packed
  • ⅓ cup avocado oil (or other neutral oil)
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice fresh squeezed
  • 2 garlic cloves minced
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon Mexican oregano
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon crushed red peppers

Instructions
 

  • Add all the ingredients, except the cilantro, into a small bowl and stir well.
  • Chop the cilantro very finely. Add the cilantro to the bowl and stir well.
  • Serve immediately or refrigerate. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Cilantro Chimichurri
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Close up view of cilantro chimichurri over steak in a rice bowl with corn, zucchini, avocado and cherry tomatoes

How to Make a Dessert Board

August 21, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

A dessert board is an easy way to turn a mix of sweets into something fun and shareable. The board or platter is loaded up with a mix of cookies, brownies, bars and fruit, or whatever you have on hand, and arranged so it looks full and inviting. It's a quick and relaxed style of serving dessert that lets everyone pick and choose their favorites.

Overhead view of a dessert board made with brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries.

A dessert board feels generous without requiring hours in the kitchen. It also gives variety so there's something for every kind of sweet tooth, from chocolate lovers to fruit fans. Most of all, it turns dessert into an interactive experience where guests can graze and try new combinations, and it keeps the party feeling fun and relaxed.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Trader Joe's Ingredients

Overhead view of the ingredients needed to make a dessert board: brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries.

Sometimes there just isn't enough time to bake six different desserts for one party. It can get pricey, and you'll end up with way more sweets than you need for a sampler style dessert board. That is where store bought treats come in handy. Different grocery stores have their own options and strengths, so we went to Trader Joe's since we knew they would have a great variety.

We grabbed macarons and lemon bars from the freezer section, brownie bites, chocolate chunk cookies and Belgian waffles from the bakery area, and mocha latte pretzels from the snack aisle. We got the strawberries in the produce section and then grabbed a tiny pack of chocolate covered almonds by the register on the way out. The whole spread came in at just under $32 and we had extras too! Even if you don't have a Trader Joe's nearby or aren't a fan, here's what we recommend when buying ingredients for and creating a dessert board:

  • 2 or more different types of cookies
  • 2 or more different types of bars and brownies
  • 1 or more fruits
  • 1 or more unusual items like the Belgian waffles
  • 2 or more small filler items like chocolate covered pretzels or nuts
Close up photo of a corner of a dessert board made with brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries

How to make a Dessert Charcuterie Board

I know, I know. Desserts aren't technically charcuterie. Traditionally, charcuterie refers to meats and cheeses. That's why I didn't call this a "dessert charcuterie board." But when you hear dessert charcuterie board, you instantly picture the look we're going for...a board piled high with a variety of colorful treats.

So how do you put together a dessert charcuterie board? Start with a large platter or cheese board. The platter shown in the photos is 11x16, with about 9x14 of usable space. Start with your first dessert and create at least three separate groupings. They don't need to be perfectly spaced. We started with the Belgian waffles since they're larger and more difficult to tuck in later. Next, choose another dessert and make at least three more groupings. Ours were strawberries, which also don't work well as fillers. From there, we added lemon bars and macarons to spread out pops of color. Chocolate chunk cookies came next so they weren't all clumped in one area. Finally, we filled in the gaps with mocha pretzels and chocolate covered almonds. Small filler items are really important because they cover empty board space and visually tie the whole board together.

Close up photo of a dessert board made with brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - If you shop at a store like Trader Joe's, they have a decent selection of gluten free items to choose from. If you're shopping at a regular grocery store, look the regular spots and in random spots too. Our closest grocery store now has a refrigerator chest of gluten free cakes and desserts right next to the regular cakes.

Storage

Store any leftover fruit and desserts separately. Any leftover fruit or lemon bars should be stored in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Most cookies and bars can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 5 to 7 days. Storage times may vary if you choose different items for your dessert board.

Next Level Tips

  • One of the keys to a great looking dessert board is to really pack in the treats. Leave as little empty space as possible.
  • Create visual interest by arranging your desserts in different directions and layers. Don't be afraid to stack some bars or turn cookies and brownies on their sides.
  • Cutting your cookies or bars into smaller pieces allows everyone to sample more of the desserts, it creates visual interest and it allows you to use cookies and bars as filler too.
  • Think about color when you're buying treats and creating your board. Strawberries are always a great choice as they add a lot of color to your board. We also like the assorted pack of macarons for all the different colors.
Close up photo of a small dessert plate with an orange macaron, brownie bite, cut strawberry, Belgian waffle piece, chocolate chip cookie and chocolate covered almond with a dessert board in the background

Pairing

These are my favorite charcuterie boards to serve with a dessert board:

  • Overhead photo of a part of Charcuterie Board made from ingredients from Aldi: strawberries, blackberries, blueberries, cheese cubes, pita chips, nuts, meat sticks and cured meats
    Aldi Charcuterie Board
  • Top view of charcuterie board with cheddar cheese, manchego cheese, assorted crackers, salami, prosciutto, strawberries, green grapesand red grapes
    How to Make a Cheap Charcuterie Board
Close up photo of a corner of a dessert board made with brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries

How to Make a Dessert Board

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Turn a mix of treats into something fun and shareable with a dessert board. We fill it with cookies, brownies, bars and fruit, and let then guests graze and choose their favorites.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 15 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 20

Ingredients
  

  • 2 or more types of cookies
  • 2 or more types of brownies and bars
  • 1 or more fruits
  • 1 or more unusual sweets like Belgian waffles
  • 2 or more small filler treats like chocolate covered pretzels or almonds

Instructions
 

  • Start by cutting any large cookies, bars or waffles into smaller pieces.
  • Next, take your first dessert and make 3 or more groupings of that dessert. They don't have to be perfectly spaced out. We started with the Belgian waffles.
  • Then, take your next dessert and make 3 or more groupings of that dessert. They can be touching, but don't have to be touching, your first 3 groups. We used strawberries for the second dessert.
  • Next place and stack some cookies and bars in different directions in three or more spots each. Think about adding color pops in different areas of the board.
  • Finally, fill in any empty, blank spots on your board with the filler items like chocolate covered pretzels or almonds.
  • If you have extra treats, you can also pile them higher vertically.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Dessert Board, Dessert Charcuterie Board, Dessert Tray
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Close up photo of a dessert board made with brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries

Zucchini Cupcakes with Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting

August 15, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Zucchini Cupcakes with Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting are a spicy twist on a classic treat. The zucchini blends seamlessly into the batter, adding tenderness without overpowering the flavor. Topped with rich cinnamon cream cheese frosting, they're a perfectly balanced treat that feels both comforting and indulgent.

Close up view of zucchini cupcakes with cinnamon cream cheese frosting on a cooling rack

I love using vegetables in baked goods. Yes, we all love carrot cake. And chocolate zucchini cake is a special chocolaty zucchini treat. But, if we skip the chocolate and add more cinnamon, then we can really let the cinnamon and zucchini shine. Also, zucchini cupcakes are a perfectly portioned way to use up some of that zucchini from the garden while sneaking in some vegetables at the same time.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make zucchini cupcakes: all purpose flour, white sugar, finely grated zucchini, eggs, neutral oil, cinnamon, baking powder, baking soda and salt
  • All purpose flour
  • Baking powder
  • Baking soda
  • Cinnamon
  • Salt
  • Neutral vegetable oil 
  • White sugar
  • Eggs
  • Finely grated zucchini 

See recipe card for quantities.

FROSTING INGREDIENTS

Ingredients needed to make cinnamon cream cheese frosting: powdered sugar, cream cheese, butter, cinnamon and heavy whipping cream
  • Cream Cheese
  • Salted Butter
  • Powdered Sugar
  • Cinnamon
  • Heavy Cream

See recipe card for quantities.

Photo of a zucchini cupcake on a plate with a bite taken out of it

Variations

  • Cinnamon - these are very cinnamon forward as I am a huge cinnamon fan. (If you want to read more about cinnamon, check out the Types of Cinnamon section in my overnight cinnamon rolls recipe.) But I know that not everyone lists cinnamon as one of their true loves. So you can certainly leave out all of the cinnamon in the cupcakes and the frosting, and they will still be awesome. However, I do recommend leaving one teaspoon of cinnamon in the cupcake base. Just one teaspoon won't be overly cinnamon-y.
  • Chocolate - making chocolate zucchini cupcakes require more than just adding cocoa powder since cocoa powder is very drying. If you want chocolate zucchini cupcakes, I suggest using the ingredients from my chocolate zucchini cake recipe along with the baking instructions from this recipe.
  • Frosting - I love cinnamon frosting, it's so cozy while still providing a little spice to the sweet frosting. However, you can also use the chocolate buttercream frosting from the chocolate zucchini cake recipe or the cream cheese frosting from the carrot cake recipe. Both are great options, and it's good to have lots of options!

Equipment

A small hole grater (or a blender or food processor) is needed for this recipe. And a hand or stand mixer is helpful for this recipe.

Close up side view of zucchini cupcakes with cinnamon cream cheese frosting closely together on a cooling rack

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Next Level Tips

  • If you want the zucchini cupcakes to have more of a green color, reduce the amount of cinnamon in the cupcake base to one teaspoon.
  • I used the Wilton 1M tip to frost the cupcakes. Like the Ateco 1M, it's a great universal tip. I always pipe frosting on cupcakes because it's quicker for me. Back when I was baking lots and lots of cupcakes, I could make frosting for and then frost 96 cupcakes per hour. There's no way to do that with a knife! The thing is, I got better at frosting cupcakes solely because I was doing it so much. Practice definitely makes you better and more efficient, at anything. But don't stress if your frosting looks a little wonky in the beginning. Everyone loves cupcakes, regardless of what they look like.
  • Do you find frosting too sweet? Add â…› teaspoon of salt to balance the sweetness. You'll be amazed at how that tiny bit of salt can cut the sweetness of frosting. You can add it at the beginning or after tasting the frosting. Just mix well after adding it.
  • Cupcakes are so great for themed events. You can match any theme just by using fun cupcake liners. The options for parties, holidays and themed events are endless.
Five zucchini cupcakes, using football themed cupcake liners, with cream cheese frosting on a serving plate

FAQ

Can I use a blender for the zucchini?

Yes, but if you use a blender, just liquify the zucchini so that you don't end up with small chunks. You could also use the grating tool on a food processor. But, for these cupcakes, I recommend grating the zucchini with a small hole grater (not a micro grater). This allows the zucchini to retain more of its liquid and makes for a nicer cupcake structure. I know using a blender sounds faster, but it's not always faster especially when you factor in clean up. Grating works better for cupcakes, and it only takes a few minutes.

Why so much cinnamon?

Cinnamon is such a great flavor, and we use a lot in this recipe to really let it shine. If cinnamon is not your favorite, you can reduce the amount of cinnamon to one teaspoon in the cupcake base. You can also reduce or eliminate the cinnamon from the frosting as well.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Close up side view of carrot cake
    Single Layer Carrot Cake (No Nuts)
  • Close up photo of a slice of chocolate zucchini cake with chocolate buttercream frosting.
    Easy Chocolate Zucchini Cake
  • One chocolate Baileys Irish Cream cupcake with Baileys buttercream frosting in front of another cupcake and a mini bottle of Baileys Irish Cream
    Baileys Irish Cream Cupcakes
  • Close up of Samoas cupcakes on a plate with toasted coconut and a box of Samoas cookies blurred in the background
    Samoas Cupcakes
Close up view of zucchini cupcakes with cinnamon cream cheese frosting on a cooling rack

Zucchini Cupcakes with Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Zucchini cupcakes with cinnamon cream cheese frosting offer a warm, spicy take on a beloved classic. Grated zucchini melts into the batter, creating a tender crumb while keeping the flavor light. A swirl of cinnamon cream cheese frosting adds richness and just the right hint of cozy sweetness.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 18 minutes mins
Cooling and frosting time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
Total Time 1 hour hr 53 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 24

Equipment

  • 1 Small hole grater
  • 1 Stand or hand mixer optional

Ingredients
  

Zucchini cupcakes

  • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 2 tablespoons cinnamon
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 ½ cups white sugar
  • ¾ cup neutral vegetable oil
  • 2 cups zucchini finely grated
  • 3 eggs

Cinnamon cream cheese frosting

  • 8 ounces cream cheese room temperature
  • 4 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
  • 4 cups powdered sugar
  • 2 tablespoons cinnamon
  • 1-3 tablespoons heavy whipping cream

Instructions
 

Zucchini cupcakes

  • Preheat the oven to 350 ℉. Line one 24-cup muffin pan or two 12-cup muffin pans with cupcake liners.
  • Combine the all-purpose flour, cinnamon, baking powder, baking soda and salt in a small bowl. Stir well and set aside.
  • Grate the zucchini with a small hole grater and set aside.
  • Add the sugar and neutral vegetable oil to a mixing bowl and mix on medium until combined.
  • Add the eggs to the mixing bowl and mix until fully integrated.
  • Add the grated zucchini to the mixing bowl and mix until fully integrated.
  • Add half of the flour mixture and mix until almost combined. Scrape down the sides, add the rest of the flour mixture and mix until fully combined. Scrape down the sides an additional time if needed.
  • Using a large 4 tablespoon cookie scoop, add one full scoop of batter to each cupcake liner.
  • Bake for 18-20 minutes until the tops spring back and the edges are starting to brown. Remove the pan from the oven and allow the cupcakes to cool in the pan for 5 minutes. Remove the cupcakes from the pan and place on a cooling rack to fully cool.

Cinnamon cream cheese frosting

  • Add the room temperature cream cheese, salted butter and cinnamon to a mixing bowl. Mix on medium speed until all the cinnamon has been incorporated into the cream cheese and butter and the mixture is light and fluffy. Scrape down the sides once or twice as needed.
  • Add the powdered sugar and one tablespoon of heavy whipping cream to the mixing bowl. Mix on medium until it starts to come together as frosting. Once the frosting starts to come together, scrape down the sides and then turn the mixer up to medium high. Mix for 2 minutes on medium high. Mixing on medium high allow air into the frosting making it lighter and fluffier. Check the consistency and if the frosting is too thick, add up to two additional tablespoons of heavy whipping cream (one at a time) and mix for 1 minute after the addition of each tablespoon of heavy cream.
  • Add the frosting to a piping bag and pipe onto cooled cupcakes. Or, use an offset spatula or knife to spread the frosting on the cooled cupcakes. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting, Zucchini Cupcakes, Zucchini Cupcakes with Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Side view of one single zucchini cupcake with cinnamon cream cheese frosting on a small dessert stand

Brown Butter Chocolate Chip Cookie Bars

August 11, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Brown butter chocolate chip cookie bars are rich, chewy and nutty. Browned butter adds another layer of flavor to this deliciously sweet classic. They bake up with crisp edges, a soft center and pockets of chocolate in every bite. Perfect for any occasion.

Overhead view of a multi layer stack of browned butter chocolate chip bars on a serving plate

My current favorite, most versatile blond bar is my white chocolate macadamia nut bar. It's an easy blond bar with countless flavor combinations and options. But what it doesn't have is brown butter. Brown butter is melted and cooked butter that adds a deep, nutty flavor that takes your bars to the next level. It just adds another layer of flavor depth to an already amazing bar.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Overhead photo of ingredients needed to make brown butter chocolate chip bars: butter, brown sugar, white sugar, eggs, vanilla, all-purpose flour, baking powder, salt and chocolate chips.
  • Butter, salted or unsalted
  • Brown sugar
  • White sugar
  • Eggs
  • Vanilla
  • All-purpose flour
  • Baking powder
  • Salt
  • Chocolate chips or chunks

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for browning butter

Overhead photo of butter melting in a skillet

Step 1: Cut the butter into smaller pieces and melt over medium to medium low heat. As butter starts to melt, stir occasionally to help butter melt evenly.

Step 2: Once melted, the butter will start to foam and the milk solids will separate and sink to the bottom. Stir more frequently once the butter starts to bubble and foam.

Step 3: Continue stirring until the milk solids have browned and give off a nutty scent. It may take 5-8 minutes in total. Remove from the heat and carefully pour the brown butter into the mixing bowl to stop the cooking process. Allow the brown butter to cool before continuing with the recipe.

Overhead photo of two brown butter chocolate chip bars on a small serving stand with other brown butter chocolate chip bars in the background

Variations

  • Add-ins - you can substitute your favorite dried fruit or nuts for some (or all) of the chocolate chips on a volume basis. For example, sometimes I'll make these with dried cherries. So, in that case, I'll use 1 cup of chocolate chips and ¾ cup of dried tart cherries. Or nuts. Some nuts, like walnuts, work great because they are softer. But, I've also made these with crunchy nuts like hazelnuts. Really though, almost any nut works well with chocolate, so use what you like and have on hand!

Brown Butter Blondie

Ok, so you might be wondering what the difference is between a brown butter chocolate chip cookie bar and a brown butter blondie? It seems like nowadays, anything that doesn't have cocoa powder or melted chocolate is called a blondie. Does that make it a blondie? Not really. Blondies are a bit more fudgy and don't always have chocolate chips. So, in that case, this recipe is a more of a cookie bar. Yet, other people claim a bar is a blondie when the recipe uses more brown sugar than white sugar. And this recipe definitely uses more brown sugar than white sugar. So this bar might be considered both. Either way, they are yummy and that's the most important part.

Randomly stacked brown butter chocolate chip cookie bars on a white plate

Storage

Store in an airtight container at room temperature for 3-4 days or in the refrigerator for up to 7 days.

Next Level Tips

  • Brown butter adds another layer of depth to almost anything you add it to, so it's perfect for cookies and cookie bars. We add a little extra butter when we use brown butter because once the butter liquifies, some of it does evaporate in the cooking process.
  • If you want to control how the top looks, you can always reserve a few of the chocolate chips (try not to eat them all!) or chunks and strategically place them into the batter before baking.
  • You can also add a little flaked salt to the finished cookie bars for texture and flavor.

FAQ

What is brown butter?

Brown butter is regular butter that's been melted and cooked until the milk solids separate and brown. As the brown butter Cookes, the milk solids separate. The milk solids will then sink to the bottom and some of the liquid will evaporate. Once the milk solids are on the bottom, they toast until they turn golden brown. You'll know the brown butter is done when it's golden brown (not dark brown) in color and it gives off a nutty aroma. The smell of nutty, brown butter is unique and unmistakably. It truly smells like warm nuts and also a bit caramel-y. So good!

What type of butter should I use?

I almost always prefer salted butter for cooking and baking. Brown butter is probably the one time I would say use either. Both will brown, but unsalted butter browns a little easier. There's a bit less stirring. Is it worth buying unsalted butter specifically to make brown butter? No. But if you have unsalted butter, use it. This time. Just add another ½ teaspoon of salt to the recipe or top with salt flakes.

What type of chocolate chips should I use?

Chocolate chips or chunks that are 50-60 percent chocolate work best in chocolate chip bars. They soften but don't melt completely. 60 percent chocolate is sometimes labelled as semi-sweet and sometimes labelled as dark chocolate. You don't have to use chocolate chips and chunks from the baking aisle. Check out the candy aisle and sometimes, there are some deals on chocolate bars as well. Just look for the same roughly 50-60 percent chocolate.

Stack of 4 brown butter cookie bars cut into squares stacked on a mini dessert stand

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Close up shot of two stacked Gluten Free Sweet Potato Brownies
    Gluten Free Sweet Potato Brownies
  • Three stacked Chopped White Chocolate Macadamia Nut Bars
    White Chocolate Macadamia Nut Bars
Overhead view of a multi layer stack of browned butter chocolate chip bars on a serving plate

Brown Butter Chocolate Chip Cookie Bars

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Brown butter chocolate chip cookie bars are chewy, rich, and full of nutty flavor. The browned butter deepens the taste of this sweet classic, while crisp edges and a soft center surround melty pockets of chocolate in every bite. 
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 30 minutes mins
Cooking and cooling brown butter 20 minutes mins
Total Time 55 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 24

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer optional

Ingredients
  

  • 18 tablespoons butter (2 sticks plus 2 tablespoons) browned
  • 1 ½ cup brown sugar
  • ½ cup white sugar
  • 2 eggs
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla
  • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour (300 grams)
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 10 ounces chocolate chips or chunks

Instructions
 

  • Brown the butter. Cut the butter into smaller pieces and heat over medium to medium low heat for 5-8 minutes. As the butter starts to melt, stir occasionally so that it melts evenly. After the butter has melted, it will start to foam. Once it starts foaming, the milk solid will separate. Stir more frequently so that you can see the color of the milk solids. Once the solids start to brown, stir even more frequently, almost constantly, until the solids are a golden brown. When the milk solids are a golden brown, it will also give off a nutty aroma. Once the milk solids are golden brown, remove the pan from the heat and carefully add the brown butter to a mixing bowl and allow to cool to room temperature.
  • Preheat the oven to 325℉. Line a 9x13 baking pan with parchment paper.
  • Add the all-purpose flour, baking powder and salt to a small bowl and set aside.
  • Once the brown butter has cooled in the mixing bowl, add the brown sugar and white sugar and mix on low to medium until integrated and smooth.
  • Add the vanilla and eggs and mix until they are fully incorporated.
  • Add half of the flour mixture and mix just until incorporated. Scrape down the sides and add the other half of the flour mixture. Mix until incorporated.
  • Fold in the chocolate chips with a spatula.
  • Add the batter to the baking pan and smooth out with a spatula.
  • Bake for 30 to 35 minutes until the edges are golden brown. Check at 30 minutes.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Brown Butter Chocolate Chip Cookie Bars
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a single layer of cut brown butter chocolate chip bars on a serving plate

Caprese Bruschetta

July 30, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Caprese bruschetta is a fresh and flavorful appetizer that combines the classic flavors of a caprese salad with pesto and crisp, toasted bread. Juicy tomatoes, creamy mozzarella, basil and pesto are piled onto slices of toasted baguette or thick bread, then finished with a drizzle of olive oil and balsamic glaze. Each bite offers a perfect balance of textures and flavors, making it an easy, crowd pleasing starter.

Overhead view of caprese bruschetta with olive oil and balsamic cream drizzle on a serving plate

I love the flavors of caprese salad, I love pesto, and I love crispy, bite size bruschetta too. So why not combine them all into one perfect appetizer? Caprese bruschetta takes the ripe tomatoes, creamy mozzarella and fresh basil and piles them on pesto-topped pieces of golden, toasted bread. Each bite delivers that delicious, juicy, basil-y flavor that everyone loves, along with the satisfying crunch of bruschetta.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Overhead photo of individual ingredients needed to make caprese bruschetta: sourdough bread, Roma tomatoes, mozzarella pearls, fresh basil, pesto, olive oil, balsamic glaze and salt.
  • Sturdy bread like sourdough, thick cut bread or baguette
  • Roma tomatoes
  • Mozarella pearls
  • Basil pesto (homemade or store bought)
  • Fresh basil leaves
  • Olive oil
  • Balsamic glaze
  • Salt

See recipe card for quantities.

Overhead photo of one serving of caprese bruschetta with balsamic drizzle on an appetizer plate.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - use a gluten free bread to make caprese bruschetta gluten free.
  • Vegan - use a vegan mozarella and a vegan pesto to make this recipe vegan.
  • Cheese - traditional caprese salad calls for buffalo mozzarella, but I feel like buffalo mozzarella isn't reliably found. If you can find it, you can certainly use it! Also, if you can't find mozzarella pearls, you can cut up another type of mozzarella like sliced mozzarella or mozzarella balls.
  • Tomatoes - you can also use cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes. For those tomatoes, you don't have to de-seed them...that would be too hard. Depending on their size, either cut them in half or quarters to match the size of the mozzarella pieces that you're using. You could even use drained, petite-diced canned tomatoes.
  • Balsamic glaze - Balsamic glaze can be found in regular grocery stores near the other vinegars. If you want to make your own balsamic vinegar reduction, you certainly can. Or you can use regular balsamic vinegar or even skip it. Balsamic vinegar adds a great pop of color and flavor, but it's not traditionally found in caprese salad.

Variations

  • Pesto - I know basil pesto isn't traditionally found in caprese salad or bruschetta, so you could skip it. But pesto is so good! I almost always have a batch of homemade pesto or a jar of Costco pesto in my refrigerator at all times. I'm always looking for new ways to use it! Give it a try.
  • Crostini - you could turn this recipe into caprese crostini easily by using smaller, harder crostini toasts.

Storage

It's best to eat any assembled caprese toast the same day you make it. You can store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator overnight, but the juice from the tomatoes will start to soak into the bread.

Three pieces of caprese baguette on a plate with balsamic drizzle in front of a serving board with additional caprese bruschetta

Next Level Tips

  • I highly recommend using a thick cut bread, a baguette loaf or a sturdy sourdough so that the bruschetta is hardy enough to take to a party as an appetizer.
  • If you love garlic, take your caprese bruschetta to the next level by rubbing garlic on the toasted bread just like you would for regular bruschetta. You don't have to press hard, it's amazing how much garlic flavor is easily released.
  • Recipes like caprese bruschetta are great recipes to practice your knife cuts. Have you ever watched cooking shows where the new chefs get yelled at for inconsistent knife cuts? I've seen plenty. Since you'll be dicing the tomatoes and the mozzarella, try to make them all the same size. Of course, it doesn't have to be perfect, but it's always good to practice.
  • I go through a lot of extra virgin olive oil, so I buy the large size from Costco. It's amazing for everything but drizzling. So I pour some into a smaller container that's easier for drizzling. The one I use is an old honey jar as shown in the ingredients photo, but you can also use a decorator bottle or any smaller container. It makes drizzling for bruschetta and salads so much easier!

FAQ

What type of bread should I use?

I highly recommend using a thick cut bread, a baguette or a sturdy sourdough so that the bruschetta is hardy enough to take to a party as an appetizer. If you're using large size bread, cut the finished caprese bruschetta into three or four pieces to make it easier to pick up.

What type of tomatoes should I use?

I recommend using de-seeded Roma tomatoes. But you can use any type of tomato. If it's a large tomato, I do recommend de-seeding them. If you need help with instructions on how to de-seed tomatoes, see my Pico de Gallo recipe. Or you can also use small grape or cherry tomatoes. For those tomatoes, just cut them in half or quarters depending on how big they are. If needed, you can also use petite diced canned tomatoes. Just make sure you drain them well.

Pieces of caprese bruschetta on a board next to a plate with additional pieces of caprese bruschetta. All drizzled with balsamic glaze.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead close up view of sliced smoked salmon bruschetta pieces on a cutting board
    Smoked Salmon Bruschetta
  • Whipped Ricotta Truffle Oil Dip
    White Truffle Garlic Bread with Whipped Ricotta

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with caprese bruschetta:

  • Close up of portobello mushroom parmesan on pasta on a plate
    Portobello Mushroom Parmesan
  • Side view of a cut Tiramisu Cheesecake on a cake stand next to a shaker of cocoa powder
    Tiramisu Cheesecake
Overhead view of caprese bruschetta with olive oil and balsamic cream drizzle on a serving plate

Caprese Bruschetta

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Caprese bruschetta is a vibrant appetizer that layers juicy tomatoes, mozzarella, basil and pesto on toasted bread. A drizzle of olive oil and balsamic glaze adds the perfect finish to this easy, crowd favorite.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 8 minutes mins
Total Time 18 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 8

Ingredients
  

  • 1 baguette or 6-8 slices of thick cut or sourdough bread
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 1 pound Roma tomatoes (about 5) de-seeded and diced
  • 8 ounces mozarella pearls
  • 4 leaves fresh basil thinly sliced
  • ½ cup basil pesto homemade or store bought
  • balsamic glaze for drizzling
  • salt to taste

Instructions
 

  • Preheat oven to 400℉. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or a baking mat.
  • Lightly brush olive oil on to both sides of the bread. Bake for 8 minutes, flipping over half way. Allow to cool.
  • De-seed the Roma tomatoes. Dice the tomatoes and mozzarella into similar size pieces. Thinly slice the basil. Gently mix together in a medium bowl.
  • After the bread has cooled, spread a thin layer of basil pesto onto one side of each piece. Spoon the tomato mixture on top of the pesto.
  • Lightly drizzle with olive oil and the balsamic glaze. Sprinkle with salt. If using larger slices of bread, cut into 3-4 smaller pieces. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Caprese Bruschetta
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Photo of two pieces of caprese bruschetta on a plate with balsamic drizzle in front of another plate with caprese bruschetta

Easy Greek Gyro Salad

July 25, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

This easy Greek gyro entree salad takes all the bold flavors of a classic gyro and turns them into a fresh, delicious salad. Slices of juicy gyro meat are paired with crisp romaine lettuce, ripe cherry tomatoes, cucumbers and red onions, then topped with a light Greek dressing and a generous spoonful of creamy tzatziki sauce. It's a lighter, gluten free twist on the beloved Greek street food that delivers the same irresistible mix of textures and flavors in every bite.

Overhead view of gyro salad made with romaine lettuce, gyro meat, cherry tomatoes, cucumbers, red onion, a light Greek dressing and a helping of tzatziki sauce on a large salad plate

I love gyros, but I find myself craving salads a lot lately. And a gyro salad is the perfect way to enjoy all the savory flavors of a classic gyro in a fresh, crisp bowl. You still get the juicy meat, cool tzatziki and vibrant veggies, but the pita can be served on the side or skipped entirely. It's truly the best of both worlds.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed for a gyro salad: gyro meat, romaine lettuce, sliced cucumber, cherry tomatoes, red onion, tzatziki sauce, olive oil, red wine vinegar and oregano
  • Gyro meat
  • Romaine lettuce
  • English cucumber
  • Cherry tomatoes
  • Red onion
  • Olive oil
  • Red wine vinegar
  • Oregano
  • Tzatziki sauce

See recipe card for quantities.

Overhead view of gyro salad made with romaine lettuce, gyro meat, cherry tomatoes, cucumbers, red onion, a light Greek dressing and a helping of tzatziki sauce on a plate next to a napkin, fork and scatter pita chips and red onion

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - gyro salad is naturally gluten free and doesn't need any adjustments. If you serve pitas on the side or are making gyro sandwiches, use gluten free pita bread.
  • Tzatziki sauce - while Tzatziki sauce is quick and easy to make, you can also buy pre-made tzatziki sauce.
  • Red wine vinegar - the best substitute for red wine vinegar is white wine vinegar. After that, I would recommend using rice wine vinegar (rice vinegar). Rice wine vinegar is more mild, but you can always add a squeeze of lemon juice for a little extra zing.

Gyro Sandwich

Is it a sandwich or a wrap? That seems debatable lately, but I'm going to go with sandwich for now. Either way, you can take all of the salad ingredients (yes, the lettuce too) and wrap it in a pita to make a sandwich or wrap. You can make your own gyro meat or buy it at places like Trader Joe's or Costco. And if you buy it at Costco, you get a lot of meat. And one way to use up all that gyro meat is to make two easy dinners. Start by cooking enough meat and cutting enough veggies for two nights of dinner. One night, have a gyro sandwich and the next night, gyro salad. Or vice versa. It's less work overall and it feels like two really different dinners even though they aren't all that different. Just skip the Greek dressing for the gyro sandwich.

Side view of a gyro sandwich containing tzatziki, tomatoes, lettuce cucumbers and onions wrapped in parchment paper on a slate board

Storage

You can store any unused cooked gyro meat, tzatziki sauce and cut vegetables separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Any lettuce that has dressing on it doesn't last long but can be stored in the refrigerator overnight.

Next Level Tips

  • If you want to add cheese, crumbled feta tastes great and is a perfect choice!
  • If you don't love raw onions, soak the sliced raw onions in water for at least 10 minutes before draining and using and they will be milder.
  • You can use the same gyro salad ingredients and wrap it in a pita to make a gyro sandwich. Lettuce and extra cucumber aren't traditionally found in a gyro sandwich, but I love any extra opportunity to sneak in more lettuce and veggies.

FAQ

Should I make my own gyro meat?

You certainly can, but then gyro salads and sandwiches are no longer easy weeknight meals. I suggest starting by buying pre-made gyro meat at Costco or Trader Joe's or your local grocery store if they carry it. If the meat part of dinner is easy, then that leaves more time for cutting veggies or making sides!

What type of lettuce should I use?

You can use any type of lettuce, including bagged lettuce, but overall romaine is a great choice. Regular romaine lettuce heads are cheaper than romaine hearts, but go with the romaine hearts if you want the crispest lettuce.

Overhead view of a gyro salad where the ingredients including the tzatziki sauce have all been mixed together

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a fork and napkin, limes and another plate of Spring Roll Salad
    Spring Roll Salad
  • Overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.
    Southwestern Cobb Salad
  • Overhead view of a cut chicken caesar salad sandwich that's been turned on it's side and is surrounded by pita style chips
    Chicken Caesar Salad Sandwich
  • Overhead view of white plate with a shrimp burrito bowl made with seasoned shrimp, cilantro rice, black beans, diced avocado, cherry tomatoes, and corn garnished with cilantro and chipotle almond drizzle. Additional chipotle almond dressing, tortilla chips, a napkin and a fork surround the plate.
    Shrimp Burrito Bowls
Overhead view of gyro salad made with romaine lettuce, gyro meat, cherry tomatoes, cucumbers, red onion, a light Greek dressing and a helping of tzatziki sauce on a plate next to a napkin and fork

Easy Greek Gyro Salad

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
A Greek gyro salad packs all the bold flavors of a classic gyro into a fresh, vibrant bowl. Tender gyro meat pairs with crisp lettuce, juicy tomatoes, cucumbers and red onions. It's finished with Greek dressing and creamy tzatziki. It's a lighter, gluten free twist on a classic street food.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 5 minutes mins
Total Time 15 minutes mins
Course Salad
Cuisine American, Greek
Servings 2

Ingredients
  

  • 8 ounces Gyro meat cooked according to package instructions
  • 6 cups romaine lettuce chopped
  • ½ medium cucumber halved and thinly sliced
  • ½ medium red onion thinly sliced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes halved or quartered
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
  • ¼ teaspoon oregano
  • 1 cup tzatziki sauce homemade or store bought

Instructions
 

  • Cook the gyro meat according to the package instructions and set aside to cool.
  • Chop the vegetables and lettuce.
  • Assemble the salad by splitting the lettuce between two large entree salad bowls or plates. Then, layer on the vegetables and gyro meat.
  • Drizzle the salads with olive oil, red wine vinegar and sprinkle with oregano. (Alternatively, you can mix the olive oil, red wine vinegar and oregano together first and drizzle it on the salads as a dressing.)
  • Top each salad with ½ cup of tzatziki sauce. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Gyro Salad
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a gyro salad where the ingredients including the tzatziki sauce have all been mixed together

Easy Tzatziki Dip

July 24, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Tzatziki dip is a creamy cucumber dip that's made with greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice and dill. It's cool, tangy and delicious. Tzatziki dip is perfect paired with pita bread, pita chips and vegetables or used as a sauce for grilled meats, gyros and salads.

Overhead view of a small bowl of tzatziki dip in the serving of a serving tray that contains pita chips, cucumbers, pita triangles and lemon wedges

Is it a dip or a sauce? The best thing about creamy cucumber tzatziki is that it can be either! Chill it and use it as an appetizer dip paired with toasted pita triangles, pita chips or cut veggies. Or use it right away as a sauce for grilled meats and gyro sandwiches or try something new like a gyro salad.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Raw ingredients needed to make tzatziki dip: English cucumber, greek yogurt, dill, lemon juice, olive oil, garlic and salt
  • English cucumber
  • Greek yogurt
  • Dill
  • Garlic
  • Lemon juice
  • Olive oil
  • Salt

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for straining the cucumber

Cucumbers are mostly water. So we grate and drain the cucumber juice so that the tzatziki dip isn't too watery.

Overhead photo of grated cucumbers in a tea towel

Step 1: Grate the cucumber with a large hole grater. Place the grated cucumber in a bowl or stainer lined with cheesecloth or a thin tea towel. (You can also use sturdy paper towels.)

Side view of cucumber straining through a tea towel

Step 2: Cinch up the tea towel around the cucumber and squeeze until all the juice has drained. Then, start to twist the cinched top of the tea towel so that it puts pressure on the cucumber and drains out even more juice. Keep twisting all the juice drains out.

Overhead view of a small bowl of tzatziki dip in the serving of a serving tray that contains pita chips, cucumbers, pita triangles and lemon wedges

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - Tzatziki dip is naturally gluten free. Serve it with gluten free pita chips, gluten free pita bread or sliced vegetables.
  • Vegan - for a vegan version, use your favorite thick vegan yogurt. If you use a thin vegan yogurt, the dip will also be thinner.
  • Cucumbers - English cucumbers are the best to use as they have less water than the typical American cucumber. If you can't find an English cucumber or they're too expensive, look for Persian cucumbers. Otherwise, regular American cucumbers are fine. They will just need more squeezing. Not a big deal.
  • Dill - If you don't like dill, you can substitute mint instead.
Overhead view of a small bowl of tzatziki dip in the serving of a serving tray that contains pita chips, cucumbers, pita triangles and lemon wedges

Storage

Store any leftover tzatziki dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-5 days.

Next Level Tips

  • I highly recommend using full fat, whole milk Greek yogurt as it will be the thickest, but you can use other types of Greek or even non-Greek yogurt.
  • If you're using tzatziki as a sauce, you can use it right away. To use it as a dip, it's best to let it chill, even overnight, in the refrigerator. That also gives it time for the flavors to meld and it will taste even better!
  • You can also save the strained cucumber juice. Just mix it with water for cucumber water, use it as a cocktail mixer or even drink it straight!
  • Tzatziki is a great dip, but it can also be used as a sauce for gyro sandwiches and gyro salads.
Side view of a gyro sandwich containing tzatziki, tomatoes, lettuce cucumbers and onions wrapped in parchment paper on a slate board

FAQ

What type of cucumber should I use?

English cucumbers are the best to use as they have less water than the typical American cucumber and are usually readily available. If you can't find English cucumber or they're too expensive though, look for Persian cucumbers. Otherwise, regular American cucumbers are fine. They will just need more squeezing. Not a big deal.

Do I have to peel and de-seed the cucumber?

No, but you certainly can if you want to. Otherwise, there is no need to take those extra steps and waste those parts of the cucumber.

Overhead view of a small bowl of tzatziki dip in the serving of a serving tray that contains pita chips, cucumbers, pita triangles and lemon wedges

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Close Up of Chipotle Almond Dip
    Chipotle Almond Dip
  • Whipped Ricotta Truffle Oil Dip
    White Truffle Garlic Bread with Whipped Ricotta

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with tzatziki dip:

  • Overhead view of gyro salad made with romaine lettuce, gyro meat, cherry tomatoes, cucumbers, red onion, a light Greek dressing and a helping of tzatziki sauce on a plate next to a napkin and fork
    Easy Greek Gyro Salad
Overhead view of a small bowl of tzatziki dip in the serving of a serving tray that contains pita chips, cucumbers, pita triangles and lemon wedges

Easy Tzatziki Sauce

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Cool and creamy tzatziki dip made with Greek yogurt, cucumber, garlic, dill and lemon juice. Serve with pitas and veggies or use as a sauce for grilled meats and gyros.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Total Time 10 minutes mins
Course Appetizer, Sauce
Cuisine American, Greek

Ingredients
  

  • 1 ½ cups cucumber (about one medium to large) grated
  • 1 cup full fat Greek yogurt
  • 2 cloves garlic pressed
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil plus 1 teaspoon for optional drizzling
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon dill minced and packed
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Instructions
 

  • Grate the cucumbers (no need to peel or de-seed) with a large hole grater and drain the juice. To drain the juice, line a bowl or strainer with a cheese cloth or tea towel. (Sturdy paper towels can also be used). Add the grated cucumber and cinch up the tea towel. Squeeze out all juice. Then twist the top of the cinched tea towel to put pressure on the grated cucumber. Continue to twist until all the liquid has drained.
  • Add all the ingredients to a small bowl and stir well.
  • For a sauce, use right away. For a thicker dip, chill a minimum of 30 minutes up to overnight.
  • For tzatziki dip, drizzle an extra 1 teaspoon of olive oil on top before serving. Serve with pita bread, pita chips or cut veggies. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Easy Tzatziki Sauce
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a small bowl of tzatziki dip with a pita triangle sticking out surrounded by pita chips, cucumbers, pita triangles and lemon wedges

Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk

July 16, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Peanut butter fudge with condensed milk is one of the easiest ways to whip up a rich, creamy treat. With just four simple ingredients, this no bake dessert comes together in minutes. It's perfect for last minute desserts, potlucks, holiday trays or anytime you're craving something sweet and satisfying.

Cut pieces of peanut butter fudge on an oval serving plate

Sometimes we just need a win. A quick, easy win. That's exactly what peanut butter fudge with condensed milk is. Simple, fast and seriously delicious. Want something peanut flavored that's a little more involved? Try my giant peanut butter cookies. Or for another nutty dessert, go all out with my pistachio cheesecake. But if you're after an effortless treat, this one hits the sweet spot.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Four ingredients

Ingredients needed for peanut butter fudge: peanut butter chips, peanut butter, sweetened condensed milk and chopped walnuts
  • Peanut butter chips
  • Peanut butter
  • Sweetened condensed milk
  • Walnuts

See recipe card for quantities.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - these are naturally gluten free, so no substitutions are necessary.
  • Peanut butter - I use regular creamy peanut butter, but you could also use crunchy peanut butter for a little extra texture or natural peanut butter. If you are using natural peanut butter, make sure it is stirred well before adding it.
  • Nuts - you could substitute peanuts or another nut of your choice. Don't be afraid of walnuts though, they are a great all-purpose nut. I always have walnuts on hand as I eat them daily for breakfast in my berry yogurt parfait. They also add texture to my Carmelitas and Peppernut cookies.
Cut peanut butter fudge squares topped with salt flakes stacked on top of each other on a serving plate

Three ingredient Peanut Butter Fudge

You have a few options for three ingredient peanut butter fudge:

  • Just omit the nuts
  • Use 2 bags of peanut butter chips plus condensed milk and walnuts
  • Use 3 cups of peanut butter plus condensed milk and walnuts

Two ingredient Peanut Butter Fudge

For two ingredient peanut butter fudge, you have two options:

  • Use 2 bags of peanut butter chips plus condensed milk
  • Use 3 cups of peanut butter plus condensed milk

Equipment

A regular sauce pan is needed to make peanut butter fudge.

Cut peanut butter fudge squares topped with salt flakes and a glass of milk on a slate plate with a napkin in the background

Storage

If you like a softer texture, store the fudge in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 7 days. However, if you like a harder texture, store it in the refrigerator for 1-2 weeks.

Next Level Tips

  • Peanut butter fudge is a great, last minute dessert. But it's also perfect for cookie exchanges and little gifts too.
  • I like to sprinkle a small amount of flaked sea salt on top. It gives the fudge another layer of flavor and added visual texture.
  • You can also add one teaspoon of vanilla when you add the walnuts for another layer of flavor.

FAQ

Why do we use both peanut butter chips and peanut butter?

Using both peanut butter chips and peanut butter gives the fudge an extra layer of flavor. Also, using only peanut butter chips can be very sweet and also expensive. And using only peanut butter can have a texture that is a little too soft. But, if you only want to use one of the two, see the above sections titled two ingredient peanut butter fudge and three ingredient peanut butter fudge for some options.

Cut peanut butter fudge squares topped with salt flakes stacked on top of each other on a serving plate

Related

Looking for other yummy dessert recipes? Try these:

  • Close up photo of giant peanut butter cookies randomly stacked on a cooling rack
    GIANT PEANUT BUTTER COOKIES
  • Close up shot of two stacked Gluten Free Sweet Potato Brownies
    Gluten Free Sweet Potato Brownies
  • Photo of Carmelitas cookie bar on parchment paper on top of cooling rack
    Carmelitas Cookie Bars
  • Close up photo of a slice of chocolate zucchini cake with chocolate buttercream frosting.
    Easy Chocolate Zucchini Cake
Cut peanut butter fudge squares topped with salt flakes on parchment paper

Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Peanut butter fudge with condensed milk is a rich, chewy treat that comes together in minutes with just four ingredients. It's perfect for holidays, last-minute desserts or anytime you want something sweet.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 5 minutes mins
Cooling time 2 hours hrs
Total Time 2 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 36

Equipment

  • 1 medium sauce pan

Ingredients
  

  • 1 10 ounce bag peanut butter chips
  • 1 ½ cups peanut butter
  • 1 14 ounce can sweetened condensed milk
  • ½ cup walnuts rough chopped
  • Optional: Flaked or regular sea salt for topping

Instructions
 

  • Line an 8x8 or 9x9 pan with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Add the peanut butter chips, peanut butter and sweetened condensed milk to a medium sauce pan. Heat on medium heat until all of the peanut butter chips have melted. Stir occasionally, more as the chips start to melt. Approximately 3-5 minutes.
  • Once the peanut butter chips have melted, stir well, remove the pan from the heat and stir in the walnuts.
  • Pour the fudge into the prepared pan. It will be thick. Use a spatula to press down and even out the fudge. Alternatively, you can place a piece of parchment paper over the top and use your fingers to press down and even out the fudge after it has cooled enough to touch.
  • Cover and refrigerate for one to two hours until set. Once the fudge has set, remove it from the pan and cut into squares. Optional: sprinkle a little flaked or regular sea salt on top.
  • For a harder texture, refrigerate the cut peanut butter fudge squares until it's time to serve. For a softer texture, store at room temperature in an airtight container.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Peanut Butter Fudge
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Cut peanut butter fudge squares topped with salt flakes on parchment paper

Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry with Veggies

July 11, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry with Veggies brings together crispy tofu, bold kimchi and colorful stir fry vegetables for a savory, satisfying meal. The tofu soaks up the flavorful sauce, while the kimchi adds a tangy, probiotic kick with deep umami notes. Fresh, crisp veggies round it out with texture, nutrients and vibrant color. It's an easy go-to for weeknight dinners.

Overhead view of a bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry with vegetables over rice with a napkin, chopsticks and a tiny bowl of sriracha on the side

Like most people, I didn't always love vegetables. And tofu and kimchi weren't always on my radar either. But once I started cooking for myself, my tastes shifted in a big way. Who wants the same tired dinner every night? Now I crave fresh veggies and look for new ways to use them. Tossing them with tofu, kimchi, and rice creates a bold, satisfying combo that I never get tired of. In fact, I make this dish almost every week. Kimchi and tofu are easy staples to keep in the fridge, and with just adding the chopped vegetables, you've got a quick, flavorful weeknight meal. It's perfect for leftovers or meal prep too.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make kimchi tofu stir fry: kimchi, tofu, onions, mushrooms, bok choy, red peppers, carrots, red cabbage, zucchini, broccolini, stir fry sauce, garlic, ginger and salt. Also shown are optional garnishes of sliced green onions and black sesame seeds.
  • Firm or extra firm tofu
  • Stir fry sauce
  • White onion
  • Red, yellow or orange pepper
  • Red cabbage
  • Bok Choy (top and bottom separated)
  • Carrots
  • Zucchini
  • Mushrooms
  • Broccolini or baby broccoli
  • Garlic
  • Ginger
  • Salt
  • Kimchi
  • Optional garnish: green onions
  • Optional garnish: sesame seeds
  • Not pictured: sesame or olive oil

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for pan searing tofu

Overhead photo of pan-seared tofu in the pan

Step 1: After pressing the tofu, cut it into small rectangles, cubes or triangles. Add a large skillet or wok to the stove on high heat. Once the pan is heated, add 1 tablespoon of sesame oil or olive oil. Then add the tofu and cook 2-3 minutes on each side or until the tops and bottoms are both golden brown.

Overhead photo of pan-seared tofu with the stir fry sauce in the pan

Step 2: Once the tofu is golden brown on both sides, add the stir fry sauce. Stir and flip until both sides of the tofu are coated in the sauce and then stir fry for an additional minute. Remove from the heat and set aside the tofu with the sauce. Wash out the pan for stir frying the vegetables.

We pan fry the tofu first so that the tofu holds its shape, and also so it will better soak up the stir fry sauce. Then we set it aside while we cook the vegetables and add it bak at the end to reheat it.

Overhead close up view of half of the bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry with vegetables

Substitutions

  • Gluten Free - this recipe is naturally gluten free as written.
  • Vegan - this recipe is naturally vegan as written.
  • Tofu - I love tofu because it takes on the flavor of whatever you want, and it's easy to always have on had. But can substitute your favorite protein for the tofu instead. Just pan fry your chicken, beef, pork or shrimp until cooked. The cooking times will vary depending on which protein you choose and how thick it's cut. Once the meat is done cooking, add the stir fry sauce and stir to coat all of the meat in the sauce. Set it aside and then follow the same instructions as the tofu for the rest of the recipe.
  • Veggies - If you have extra carrots, zucchini or peppers from your garden or the neighbor's garden, definitely use those and cut down on a different vegetable. This recipe is easily customizable.

Variations

  • Spicy - you can add in Sriracha, Gochujang or a spicy chili oil at the same time you add the garlic and ginger. Not everyone likes the same spice levels though, so I like to serve it on the side. I like Sriracha on the side, and my husband puts wasabi and soy sauce on everything. So afterwards works best when everyone likes different spice levels.
Overhead view of a partial bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry over rice that is partially eaten and has a fork sticking out

Equipment

A large skillet or wok is needed to make stir fry.

Storage

Store leftover tofu kimchi stir fry in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.

Next Level Tips

  • When I make stir fry, I always use tofu and kimchi because they're easy to always have on hand. Hence the title of this recipe! After that, I also try to always use onions, mushrooms, garlic and ginger. Over the years, I've found that mushrooms truly do make a difference with their umami flavor. But as to the rest of the vegetables, you can vary those if you want. I almost always have red cabbage on hand too. I use it for my daily lunch tacos, fish tacos and spring roll salad to name a few. It stays good much longer than lettuce!
  • If you have refined sesame oil (not toasted), use that for pan frying the tofu and the veggies. Olive oil or avocado oil will also work, but sesame oil adds another layer of flavor that compliments the stir fry better.
  • We add the sauce to the tofu so that the tofu will suck up the flavor, and we don't want the vegetables to be too saucy. You can always add more sauce to taste at the every end or on the side.
  • Kimchi tofu stir fry is great for work lunches and meal prep too!
Overhead view of kimchi tofu stir fry in a meal prep container

FAQ

What kind of stir fry sauce should I use?

Your favorite kind! Seriously though, if you want to make a homemade sauce, please do. There are a ton of great recipes out there. But if you have limited time, I'd recommend using that time to cut veggies and then use bottled sauce. (And I rarely ever use bottled sauce, so this is one of my exceptions.) Grocery stores literally have sauces called 'Stir Fry Sauce' in the international section. Or you can use Hoisin Sauce if you already have that in the refrigerator, just use half Hoisin Sauce and half soy sauce. I've been using vegan mushroom sauce as my stir fry sauce for years. I love going to Asian grocery stores and that's where I usually buy it. But if you don't have an Asian grocery store nearby, mushroom sauce can be found on Amazon or other online stores too.

What kind of rice should I use?

Any type of white, brown or wild rice will work in a pinch. However, there are rices that are better suited to go with stir fry. If you don't already have a favorite, I would recommend white or brown jasmine rice. It's a long grain rice that is a bit sticky but not too sticky. It tastes great and is perfect to serve with stir fry.

Why do I add the vegetables in stages?

We add vegetables in stages so that they all have a chance to remain crisp as different vegetables cook at different speeds. Harder vegetables need more time than softer vegetables.

Why don't I add the garlic and ginger at the beginning?

Stir fry at home can take longer than stir fry in a commercial kitchen that has hot woks. And we don't want the garlic or ginger to burn. Adding the garlic and ginger a little later in the cooking process also preserves some more of the flavor.

Overhead view of a bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry with vegetables over rice with a tiny bowl of sriracha and another bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry in the background

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead view of a partial bowl of kimchi slaw in a bowl
    Kimchi Slaw
  • Overhead view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a fork and napkin, limes and another plate of Spring Roll Salad
    Spring Roll Salad
Overhead view of a bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry with vegetables over rice with chopsticks on the side and a tiny bowl of sriracha in the background

Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry with Veggies

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry is a bold, flavorful dish that pairs crispy tofu with tangy kimchi and colorful stir fry vegetables. It's an easy, nutrient-rich meal that delivers satisfying texture and deep umami flavor in every bite.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 30 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 50 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine Asian Fusion
Servings 4

Equipment

  • 1 Wok or large skillet

Ingredients
  

  • 1 16 ounce firm or extra firm tofu pressed and cubed
  • ½ cup stir fry sauce
  • 2 tablespoons sesame oil or olive oil separated
  • 1 medium white onion large strips
  • ½ medium red bell pepper bite size rectangles
  • 2 small baby bok choy heads thinly sliced tops and bite size rectangle bottoms, separated
  • ½ cup red cabbage bite size rectangles
  • 1 small zucchini cut in half, then sliced
  • 1 large carrot thinly sliced
  • 1 ½ cups mushrooms quartered
  • 1 small broccolini head cut tops and stems into large bite sized pieces
  • 2 large garlic cloves minced
  • 1 inch ginger root, peeled minced
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 cup kimchi*
  • 2 green onion stalks, sliced optional
  • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds optional
  • soy sauce optional for serving
  • sriracha or gochujang optional for serving

Instructions
 

  • Press the tofu. Remove the tofu from the package, drain well and press. (To press, wrap the tofu in several layers of paper towels or reusable napkins and place it on a plate. Place another place on top and place one or two canned beans on top of the top plate to add weight and press down on the tofu.) Let the tofu press for 30 minutes.
  • While the tofu is pressing, chop and prep all of the vegetables.
  • After 30 minutes of pressing, remove the paper towels from the tofu and cut the tofu into small rectangles, cubes or triangles.
  • Before cooking the tofu, start the rice cooking. Cook the rice according to the package directions. Or, if using white jasmine rice and a rice cooker or instant pot, add 2 cups of white rice. Cover with 3 cups of water and choose the rice (or white rice) function on the rice cooker or instant pot.
  • Heat a large skillet or wok on high heat. Once the pan is hot, then add one tablespoon of sesame or olive oil and then the tofu. Pan fry the tofu for 2-3 minutes until the bottoms are golden brown. Then flip and repeat on the other side.
  • Once the tofu is golden brown on both sides, add the stir fry sauce. Stir until both sides of all the tofu pieces are coated in the sauce. Then continue cooking for another 60 seconds. The pan is very hot, and the stir fry sauce may bubble and spatter some. If it's too much, turn the heat down. Most stir fry sauce has a lot of sugar which will start to caramelize for great flavor. After 60 seconds, remove the pan from the heat and transfer the tofu and sauce to a bowl. Clean out the pan.
  • Return the clean skillet or wok to the stove on high heat. Once the pan is hot, add one tablespoon of sesame or olive oil. Then add the onions and cook for 2 minutes until the onions start to soften.
  • Next, add the bell peppers, baby bok choy bottoms and the red cabbage. Stir and then cook for two minutes or until they start to soften.
  • Next, add the zucchini, carrots and mushrooms. Stir and cook for two minutes or until they start to soften.
  • Then, add the baby broccolini, garlic, ginger and salt. Stir well and cook for one more minute.
  • Finally add the baby bok choy tops, the kimchi* and the cooked tofu. Stir well and cook just until the kimchi and tofu are heated through.
  • Garnish with optional green onion slices and sesame seeds.
  • Serve with soy sauce and Sriracha or Gochujang on the side.

Notes

It's not necessary to drain the kimchi. Just scoop it out of the container with a slotted spoon.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry with Vegetables
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a partial bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry over rice that is partially eaten and has chop sticks sticking out

Mini Cinnamon Rolls

July 8, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Mini cinnamon rolls are soft, fluffy mini swirls filled with gooey cinnamon and brown sugar in every bite. They're perfect when you want a smaller treat, especially for brunch spreads with lots of options. And because they're mini, going back for seconds or thirds feels completely guilt-free.

Overhead view of a partial pan of mini cinnamon rolls

I love cinnamon rolls. All kinds-overnight cinnamon rolls, chocolate espresso rolls, Biscoff cinnamon rolls. There is just something about mini rolls though. They're the perfect size, yet still small enough to tempt you into grabbing just one more. They're great for feeding a crowd or bringing to a big brunch spread or potluck. You can even pair them with my mini pesto rolls for a sweet and savory brunch combo that everyone will love.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for the dough and filling

Ingredients needed for mini cinnamon roll dough and filling: all purpose flour, whole milk, active dry yeast, salted butter, white sugar, salt, eggs, brown sugar and cinnamon
  • Whole milk
  • Active dry yeast
  • White sugar
  • Salted butter
  • Eggs
  • All purpose flour
  • Salt
  • Brown sugar
  • Cinnamon

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the frosting

Ingredients for cinnamon rolls frosting
  • Cream Cheese
  • Salted Butter
  • Powdered Sugar
  • Heavy Cream
  • Vanilla (optional)
  • Salt

Instructions for cutting the dough

Because we're making mini rolls, there are some tips that making cutting easier. I highly recommend using a pizza cutter as described below.

Overhead view of rolled out cinnamon roll dough topped with the butter, brown sugar and cinnamon filling and cut into twelve strips using a pizza cutter

Roll the dough into an approximate 12 x 18 inch rectangle. Top with salted butter and the cinnamon brown sugar mixture, and lightly press down. With a pizza cutter, cut the dough into 12 long vertical strips and then cut those horizontally across the middle. Roll up each of the 24 pieces and add them directly to the baking pan.

You don't need to roll the dough out into a perfect rectangle. If the dough is resistant, leave it to rest for 5-10 minutes and continue rolling. If it's not perfect, that's okay! One option would be to cut smaller strips so that you don't have to use the sides. Personally, I'm not overly patient, but I also don't like wasting dough. So I start rolling in the middle and work my way out to the sides. When I get to the sides/ends, I reshape those as needed. They are just as yummy even when they're not the perfect shape. Add extra icing and no one will know. Don't sweat that small stuff!

Overhead view of a full pan of 24 mini cinnamon rolls

Substitutions

  • Vegan - this recipe works well with high quality vegan substitutes. My recommendations are to use Bob Mill's egg replacer or to make flax eggs (for three flax eggs, mix three tablespoon of flaxseed meal and nine tablespoons of water and let sit for 10 minutes), to use oat milk, a high quality vegan butter like Miyokos brand, and your favorite heavy cream replacement. My current favorite vegan heavy cream is Trader Joe's brand. I will caution against vegan replacements that have a strong coconut flavor, unless you and your guests (if you are sharing) truly love coconut.

Equipment

A stand or hand mixer is helpful in making mini cinnamon rolls.

Storage

Store in an airtight container at room temperature for 1-2 days or in the refrigerator for 5-7 days. To warm up mini cinnamon rolls the next day, just microwave them for 10-15 seconds. Not long enough to melt the frosting but just enough to warm them up.

Overhead view of a mini cinnamon roll on a plate next to a latte in front of the pan of mini cinnamon rolls

Next Level Tips

  • Everyone loves cinnamon rolls, but the kind of cinnamon you use can take your sweet rolls to a whole other level! Try a single source, organic brand. I'm currently in love with Ceylon cinnamon from Indonesia. Cinnamon is like coffee and chocolate. Where it's made and how it's made matters!
  • Weigh your flour! Even when a recipe lists flour in cups, I definitely recommend weighing the flour. If you don't already have a kitchen scale, you can find them for under $10 on Amazon. Different brands of flour have different weights, and not everyone measures flour the same. I use Kirkland's organic all-purpose flour from Costco, and I always weigh flour even if I don't weigh any other of the ingredients. The nutritional label of all flours will tell you how much each serving size (usually ¼ cup) weighs. But, if you don't have a kitchen scale, the next best way to measure flour is the fluff and scoop method. Fluff the flour in its container and then lightly scoop the flour into the measuring cup with a spoon. Lightly level the measuring cup with a knife.
  • Having brunch and want to pair these mini cinnamon rolls with a savory mini roll? Try my mini pesto rolls!

FAQ

Can I make these into full size rolls?

Yes, you will just need to bake them slightly longer. Instead of the 24 mini rolls, bake the 12 full size rolls for 27-32 minutes. Or you can follow my overnight cinnamon roll recipe for full size rolls that you let rise overnight or bake the same day.

Can I prep these ahead of time?

Yes! After you roll up the mini cinnamon rolls, cover and place them in the refrigerator (skipping the second room temperature rise). The next day, allow them to warm up on the kitchen counter for about 30 minutes before baking. They may take a few minutes longer to bake if they are still cool when they go in the oven.

Close up side view of a cut cinnamon roll on a plate with a fork with a bite on it in front

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Chocolate sweet roll with espresso frosting on plate
    Chocolate Sweet Rolls with Espresso Frosting
  • Top view of lemon raspberry sweet roll on a plate
    Lemon Raspberry Sweet Rolls
  • Overhead photo of Biscoff cinnamon roll on a plate with a bite taken out in front of a partial view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls
    Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls
  • Overhead view of four cinnamon rolls in mini square baking cups on top of a cooling rack.
    Small Batch Cinnamon Rolls
Overhead view of a full pan of 24 mini cinnamon rolls

Mini Cinnamon Rolls

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Mini cinnamon rolls are soft, fluffy mini swirls filled with gooey cinnamon and brown sugar, perfect for when you want just a little something sweet. Their small size makes them ideal for brunch spreads and for enjoying more than one without a second thought.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 22 minutes mins
Rise and roll time 1 hour hr 40 minutes mins
Total Time 2 hours hrs 17 minutes mins
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Servings 24

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer

Ingredients
  

Dough

  • ¾ cup whole milk
  • 2 ¼ teaspoons active dry yeast
  • ¼ cup white sugar
  • 8 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
  • 3 eggs room temperature
  • 4 ½ cups all-purpose flour (540 grams)
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Filling

  • 2 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 2 tablespoons cinnamon

Frosting

  • 4 ounces cream cheese room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
  • 2 cups powdered sugar (8 ounces)
  • 1 tablespoon heavy cream
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla optional

Instructions
 

Making the dough

  • Take out the butter and eggs to bring them to room temperature.
  • Heat the milk in microwave until warm 105℉ - 110℉. [It's best to use a kitchen thermometer if you have one.] Add the warm milk, yeast and a little of the white sugar to the mixer bowl. Let sit for 5-10 minutes.
  • Add the rest of the sugar, the softened butter and the eggs to the mixing bowl. Mix on low speed until the eggs are incorporated. The butter will not incorporate at this stage, which is normal.
  • Add the flour and salt mixture to the mixing bowl in three different stages. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl after each addition and then mix on a low speed until the flour has been incorporated. Repeat until all flour has been added.
  • After the flour has been incorporated, switch to the dough hook and knead on low speed for 5 minutes.
  • Spray a large bowl (or reuse the mixing bowl) with cooking spray. The dough is sticky and that's normal. Let the dough rise in a covered bowl for a total of 60 minutes. After 30 minutes, knead the dough using the stretch and fold method. If you're familiar with this method, do it in the bowl. If this is your first time, take the dough out of the bowl and set on a floured surface. Take ahold of a large piece of dough at the 12 position, stretch it away from your body, and then fold it back toward the middle of the dough ball. Rotate the ball ⅛ to ¼ of a turn and repeat the stretch out and fold back over motions. Keep repeating until you have gone around 2 times and the dough becomes less stretchy. You DO NOT have to do the stretch and fold, but it does make the rolls more fluffy and soft. Put the dough back in the bowl to rise for another 30 minutes. So, the total rise time is 60 minutes with the optional stretch and fold after 30 minutes.

Making the filling

  • Spray a ¼ sheet pan baking sheet (or a 9x13 pan) with cooking spray and set aside.
  • After the dough has risen for the total of 60 minutes, put it on a floured surface and roll it out into a 12 x 18 inch rectangle. [If the dough is ever resistant, let it rest for 10 minutes. Don't overwork the dough trying to roll it out. It should roll out easily.]
  • Brush 2 tablespoons of very soft butter on to the dough with a pastry or silicone brush. You want to use very soft but not melted butter. Think of the butter as the glue that will hold the brown sugar and cinnamon to the dough. You can also use your fingers or a knife to spread the butter.
  • Mix the brown sugar and cinnamon together in a small bowl until the cinnamon is incorporated into the sugar.
  • Sprinkle the brown sugar and cinnamon mixture evenly over the dough and lightly press it in.
  • Because these are mini rolls, the easiest cutting method is using a pizza cutter. Using a pizza cutter, cut 12 vertical strips. Then cut those in half horizontally for a total of 24 pieces. Roll them up individually and add them to the baking pan.
  • Cover the mini cinnamon rolls and allow them to rise for 30 minutes. Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 350 ℉.
  • Bake uncovered for 22-25 minutes until the tops are lightly golden brown.

Making the frosting

  • Put the softened cream cheese and softened butter in to a mixing bowl and mix until thoroughly combined and fluffy.
  • Add the powdered sugar, heavy whipping cream, salt and vanilla and mix until light and fluffy. It takes less than two minutes. The vanilla is optional. It adds a nice touch of flavor but it also tints the frosting if using regular brown vanilla, so keep that in mind. The salt cuts some of the sweetness of the sugar.
  • Allow the mini cinnamon rolls to cool for a minimum of 10 minutes before frosting so that the frosting does not immediately melt. You can also wait until the rolls have completely cooled to frost them. Spread the frosting on the rolls with an offset icing spatula or any small spatula or knife.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Mini Cinnamon Rolls
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Side view into a baking pan of mini cinnamon rolls with some missing so that you can see the  sweet dough layers

Mini Pesto Rolls

July 3, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Mini Pesto Rolls are bite-sized swirls of soft, fluffy dough that melt in your mouth. Each pinwheel roll is filled with basil pesto and rich Gruyère cheese, creating a deliciously savory flavor. Whether served as an appetizer, party snack, brunch bite or side dish, these irresistible little rolls deliver a delicious burst of goodness in every bite. Perfect for sharing-though you may want to keep them all to yourself!

Overhead view of a fill ¼ sheet baking pan of baked mini pesto rolls topped with Parmesan Cheese and cracked pepper

I love mini rolls. Especially for sharing, and especially at brunch potlucks. Sometimes, full-sized sweet or savory rolls are just too big. You want to sample everything, but there's only so much room on your plate. And that's where mini rolls really shine! They're the perfect size to fit on your brunch plate while still leaving room to try all the other delicious options. And hey, you can always go back for seconds (or thirds) if there are any left. These cute little mini rolls disappear fast!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Instructions for rolling and cutting the dough

Because we're making mini rolls, there are some tips that making rolling easier. I highly recommend using a pizza cutter as described below.

Overhead view of rolled out dough topped with pesto and grated gruyere cheese

Step 1: Roll out the dough into an approximately 12 x 18 rectangle. Top with basil pesto and grated gruyere cheese.

Overhead view of rolled out uncooked dough, topped with pesto and gruyere cheese and then cut into strips with a pizza cutter

Step 2: With a pizza cutter, cut the dough into 12 long vertical strips and then cut those horizontally across the middle. Roll up each of the 24 pieces.

Overhead view of unbaked pesto rolls in a ¼ baking sheet

Step 3: Add the mini rolls to a baking pan or sheet. Bake at 350℉ for 22-25 minutes.

Overhead view of a baked pan of mini pesto rolls topped with more pesto, grated Parmesan Cheese and cracked black pepper

Substitutions

  • Cheese - I love using gruyere cheese with pesto. It melts really nicely and doesn't overpower the pesto. However, you can substitute another cheese. If you only have mozzarella at home, use mozzarella.
  • Basil pesto - homemade basil pesto is simple the best. But I get it, it can be expensive to make. You can also make pesto with a different herb besides basil or a different nut (or seed!) to make it cheaper or just for a change. You can also buy pre-made basil pesto. Costco's Kirkland Signature brand of Basil Pesto is good and priced well.

Equipment

A hand or stand mixer is needed for making mini pesto pinwheel rolls.

Storage

Store any leftover pesto pinwheels in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.

Side view of one mini pesto roll on a plate in front of the baking pan of pesto rolls

Next Level Tips

  • Make your own simple basil pesto to take these to the next level.
  • If you are grating your own parmigiano reggiano cheese, I like the larger grate size. However, if you want it more melted on the top, use a smaller micro grater. You can buy pre-grated parmesan cheese, but grating your own cheese is usually cheaper and almost always tastes better.
  • Weigh your flour! Even when a recipe lists flour in cups, I definitely recommend weighing the flour. If you don't already have a kitchen scale, you can find them for under $10 on Amazon. Different brands of flour have different weights, and not everyone measures flour the same. If you don't have a kitchen scale, the next best way to measure flour is the fluff and scoop method. Fluff the flour in its container and then lightly scoop the flour into the measuring cup with a spoon. Lightly level the measuring cup with a knife. I use Kirkland's organic all-purpose flour from Costco, and I always weigh flour even if I don't weigh any other of the ingredients.
  • Add-ins! If you love garlic, mix in more minced garlic with the basil pesto filling. Or maybe you have leftover caramelized onions from pizza night. Those are amazing in the filling too.

FAQ

Can I make these into full size rolls?

Yes, you will just need to bake them slightly longer. Instead of the 24 mini rolls, bake the 12 full size rolls for 27-32 minutes.

Can I prep these ahead of time?

Yes! After you roll up the mini pesto rolls, cover and place them in the refrigerator. The next day, allow them to warm up on the kitchen counter for about 30 minutes before baking. They may take a few minutes longer to bake if they are still cool when they go in the oven.

Overhead view of a baked pan of mini pesto rolls topped with more pesto, grated Parmesan Cheese and cracked black pepper

Related

Looking for sweet roll recipes? Try these:

  • 9 Cinnamon Rolls in Cast Iron Pan
    Overnight Cinnamon Rolls
  • Top view of lemon raspberry sweet roll on a plate
    Lemon Raspberry Sweet Rolls
  • Chocolate sweet roll with espresso frosting on plate
    Chocolate Sweet Rolls with Espresso Frosting
  • Overhead photo of Biscoff cinnamon roll on a plate with a bite taken out in front of a partial view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls
    Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls
View of a partial baking pan on mini pesto rolls topped with Parmesan Cheese and cracked pepper

Mini Pesto Rolls

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Mini pesto pinwheel rolls are soft, fluffy bites filled with vibrant basil pesto and melty cheese. Their golden, tender layers deliver big flavor in a perfect mini size that's ideal for pairing with any spread.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 22 minutes mins
Rise time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Total Time 2 hours hrs 7 minutes mins
Course Brunch
Cuisine American
Servings 24

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer

Ingredients
  

  • ¾ cup whole milk
  • 2 ¼ teaspoons active dry yeast
  • 2 tablespoons white sugar
  • 8 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
  • 3 eggs room temperature
  • 4 ½ cups all purpose flour (540 grams)
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Filling

  • ¾ cup basil pesto homemade or store-bought
  • 1 cup gruyere cheese grated

Topping

  • ¼ cup basil pesto
  • ½ cup parmigiano reggiano cheese grated
  • black pepper to taste

Instructions
 

Dough

  • Take out the butter and eggs to bring them to room temperature.
  • Heat the milk in microwave until warm 105℉ - 110℉. [It's best to use a kitchen thermometer if you have one.] Add the warm milk, yeast and the white sugar to the mixer bowl. Let sit for 5-10 minutes.
  • Add the flour and salt to a small bowl and set aside.
  • Add the softened butter and the eggs to the mixing bowl. Mix on low speed until the eggs are incorporated. The butter will not incorporate at this stage, which is normal.
  • Add the flour and salt mixture to the mixing bowl in three different stages. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl after each addition and then mix on a low speed until the flour has been incorporated. Repeat until all flour has been added.
  • After the flour has been incorporated, switch to the dough hook and knead on low speed for 5 minutes.
  • Spray a large bowl (or reuse the mixing bowl) with cooking spray. The dough is sticky and that's normal. Let the dough rise in a covered bowl for a total of one hour. After 30 minutes, knead the dough using the stretch and fold method. If you're familiar with this method, do it in the bowl. If this is your first time, take the dough out of the bowl and set on a floured surface. Take ahold of a large piece of dough at the 12 o'clock position, stretch it away from your body, and then fold it back toward the middle of the dough ball. Rotate the ball ⅛ to ¼ of a turn and repeat the stretch out and fold back motions. Keep repeating until you have gone around 2 times and the dough becomes less stretchy. You DO NOT have to do this, BUT it does make the rolls more fluffy and soft. Put the dough back in the bowl to rise for another 30 minutes. So the total first rise time is one hour with the optional stretch and fold after 30 minutes.

Filling

  • Spray a 9x13 pan or a ¼ baking sheet with cooking spray and set aside.
  • After the dough has risen for 60 minutes, put it on a floured surface and roll it out into a 12 x 18 inch rectangle. [If the dough is ever resistant, let it rest for 10 minutes. Don't overwork the dough trying to roll it out. It should roll out easily.]
  • Spread ¾ cup of basil pesto over the rolled out dough. Then sprinkle 1 cup of grated gruyere cheese over the basil pesto .
  • Because these are mini rolls, the easiest cutting method is using a pizza cutter. Using a pizza cutter, cut 12 vertical strips. Then cut those in half horizontally for a total of 24 pieces. Roll them up individually and add them to the baking pan.
  • Cover the mini pesto rolls and allow them to rise for 30 minutes. Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 350 ℉.
  • Bake uncovered for 22-25 minutes until the tops are lightly golden brown.

Topping

  • After removing the rolls from the oven, spread ¼ cup of basil pesto over the warm rolls.
  • Top with ½ cup of grated parmigiano reggiano cheese.
  • Finished with a small amount of cracked black pepper.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Mini Pesto Rolls
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Side view of one mini pesto roll on a plate in front of the baking pan of pesto rolls

Chicken Caesar Salad Sandwich

July 2, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Chicken Caesar Salad Sandwich is an easy meal that brings together a classic Caesar salad and a chicken salad sandwich. It is made with chopped chicken, grated parmesan cheese, mini croutons, romaine lettuce and creamy Caesar dressing. Everything gets packed onto toasted bread or a soft hoagie roll for something quick that works for lunch, dinner or anytime you want something simple and satisfying.

Side view of a cut and split chicken caesar salad sandwich on a hoagie roll

Caesar salad and chicken salad sandwiches have both been around for a while, and I am not totally sure which came first. Either way, this feels like a combination that should have happened sooner. Simple, familiar, and it just works. It is basically a chicken Caesar salad turned into a handheld sandwich.

But, the best part is this chicken Caesar salad filling is not limited to sandwiches. The same filling works in a wrap or turned into a quick chicken Caesar salad bruschetta for an easy appetizer. It is one of those recipes that changes depending on what you are in the mood for.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make a chicken caesar salad sandwich: cooked and cubed chicken, Parmesan Cheese, mini croutons, romaine lettuce, Caesar dressing, hoagie buns, salt and pepper.
  • Chopped chicken
  • Romaine lettuce hearts
  • Parmesan cheese
  • Caesar salad dressing
  • Mini croutons
  • Salt
  • Black pepper

See recipe card for quantities.

Side view of a whole, uncut chicken caesar salad sandwich on a white plate

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - Use gluten free bread and gluten free croutons. You can also skip the croutons and use romaine leaves as a wrap if you want something gluten free and lighter.
  • Parmesan cheese - I always recommend real Parmigiano Reggiano cheese. If you don't have that or it's too expensive, I recommend using Grana Padano cheese next.

Chicken Caesar Wrap Variation

Chopped chicken Caesar salad works great as a wrap too. Just place about a cup of the chicken Caesar salad mixture in a large burrito-size tortilla and roll. Perfect for a trip to the beach or the lake.

Side view of four cut pieces of chicken caesar salad wraps so the you can see what's on the inside

Chicken Caesar Bruschetta Variation

Fun bruschetta flavors are currently having a moment right now. Have you seen my smoked salmon bruschetta, caprese bruschetta and butternut squash toast recipes? Well, chicken Caesar salad makes a great bruschetta topper too! Just use the same method for the bread from the smoked salmon bruschetta recipe, then chop the chicken Caesar salad from this recipe into much smaller pieces, top the bread with it and you've got yourself chicken Caesar salad bruschetta! When I make chicken Caesar salad bruschetta, I like to finish it with extra grated parmesan and more cracked black pepper. Optional tip: for better sticking power, lightly brush the bruschetta bread with a bit of Caesar dressing before topping with the salad.

Chicken caesar salad bruschetta on full size sourdough bread with each piece cut into four pieces

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days if stored separately. If the chicken Caesar salad has already been spread on the bread, store the sandwich in an airtight container in the refrigerator until the next day.

Next Level Tips

  • Along with my BLT chicken salad, this is one of my favorite ways to use leftover chicken. Maybe you have leftover grilled chicken from my Southwestern Chicken Cobb Salad recipe. Leftover rotisserie chicken works great too.
  • If you don't have leftovers and need a shortcut, store bought cooked chicken strips work too. I promise I won't judge.
  • Feeding the whole family? Just change the recipe quantity to 2x or 3x.
Side view of a cut chicken caesar salad sandwich that was flipped so that you can see the cut side of both pieces

FAQ

Can I make my own Caesar salad dressing?

Yes, of course you can make your own Caesar salad dressing. Or you can use your favorite bottled Caesar dressing. Caesar salad dressing is one of those things that I have no desire to make. I love Caesar salad, but don't ask me to tell you what's in the ingredients. Raw eggs and anchovies? No thank you! But if you want to give it a try, here is currently one of the most popular homemade Caesar salad dressing recipes out there.

Can I use a different lettuce?

Yes, you can use full romaine heads or a different type of lettuce. Or even spinach or kale. However, romaine lettuce hearts are crisper and tastier, so that's what I recommend.

What if I can't find mini croutons?

If you can't find mini croutons, you can chop larger size croutons into smaller pieces or you can give larger croutons a few pulses in a food processor or blender.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Fresh is best for salad, you can make the salad a day ahead of time. It's a great make-ahead recipe for a picnic or trip to the lake.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead view of a Chicken BLT Salad with ranch dressing in the middle and a fork, knife and napkin on the side with loose grape tomatoes and croutons in the background
    Chicken BLT Salad
  • Overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.
    Southwestern Cobb Salad
  • Close up photo of a cut grilled cheese sandwich stacked on top of each other
    Four Cheese Grilled Cheese
  • Overhead close up view of sliced smoked salmon bruschetta pieces on a cutting board
    Smoked Salmon Bruschetta
Overhead view of a cut chicken caesar salad sandwich that's been turned on it's side and is surrounded by pita style chips

Chicken Caesar Salad Sandwich

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Chicken Caesar salad sandwiches combines the best parts of a Caesar salad and a chicken salad sandwich in to one easy meal. Chopped chicken, crisp romaine, parmesan and creamy dressing are packed onto a fresh hoagie roll. Great for a quick lunch or a light dinner.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
0 minutes mins
Total Time 10 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Servings 2

Ingredients
  

  • 2 cups romaine lettuce hearts chopped small
  • 1 cup cooked chicken chopped small
  • ½ cup mini croutons
  • ½ cup parmesan cheese grated
  • ⅓ cup Caesar salad dressing
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 hoagie or sandwich rolls (or bread of choice)

Instructions
 

  • Combine all the ingredients in to a large bowl. Mix until all ingredients are coated with the Caesar salad dressing. Add any more Caesar salad dressing, salt or pepper to taste.
  • Toast the sandwich rolls if so desired.
  • Depending on the size of the bread, add about one cup of the Caesar salad mixture to each sandwich roll. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Chicken Caesar Salad Sandwich
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a cut chicken caesar salad sandwich that's been turned on it's side and is surrounded by pita style chips

Raspberry Brioche French Toast Casserole

June 27, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 4 Comments

Raspberry Brioche French Toast Casserole is a bold upgrade of a family favorite, combining tart raspberries, creamy goat cheese and crunchy pecans in every bite. The custard-soaked bread turns golden in the oven, while the goat cheese melts into creamy, tangy pockets throughout. Finished with a drizzle of maple syrup, it's a sweet and tangy dish that is both delicious and fresh.

Overhead photo of slice of baked raspberry brioche French toast casserole on a plate with the rest of the baking pan of French toast casserole in the background

Baked French Toast Casserole is the perfect way to serve French Toast to a crowd. Everyone loves French Toast, but nobody likes cold French Toast. Sometimes, when you're making a lot of French toast, the beginning pieces are cold by the time you the last pieces are done cooking. Or you have to serve French Toast to your family or guests as you make it so that everyone gets hot pieces. So that's where baked French Toast comes in. Everyone gets their French Toast hot and at the same time. This recipe also takes baked French Toast Casserole up a level by adding raspberries, goat cheese and pecans.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make baked raspberry brioche French Toast: cubed brioche bread, raspberries, goat cheese, pecan pieces, eggs, whole milk, brown sugar, vanilla and cinnamon.
  • Cubed brioche bread
  • Raspberries
  • Goat cheese
  • Pecan pieces
  • Eggs
  • Whole milk
  • Brown sugar
  • Vanilla
  • Cinnamon
  • Optional: salted butter, maple syrup and powdered sugar

See recipe card for quantities.

45 degree view of a pan of baked raspberry brioche French toast casserole that has two pieces missing so the you can see the multiple layers of brioche, goat cheese and raspberries.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - to make this recipe gluten free, substitute your favorite gluten free bread.
  • Bread - brioche bread is a soft bread that soaks up the eggs and milk easily. Most stale bread will soak up eggs and milk, so if you have a favorite bread, you can use it. Challah works well. So does a baguette or sourdough. You can even mix different types of breads if you have miscellaneous leftover pieces.
  • Goat cheese - if you don't like or don't have goat cheese, you can substitute cream cheese as that's the most common cheese found in baked French Toast casserole. But you could also use other soft cheeses like mascarpone or ricotta.
  • Raspberries - you can substitute your favorite berry if you prefer blueberries, blackberries or another kind of berry.

Storage

Store any leftover baked raspberry brioche French Toast casserole in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

Close up photo of bake raspberry brioche French toast in the baking pan with a few slices missing

Next Level Tips

  • Don't be afraid to experiment with different berries, breads, cheeses and nuts.
  • Use a high quality cinnamon. French Toast just isn't French Toast without a bit of cinnamon!
  • If you're hosting a big brunch, this is a dish that can be prepped ahead of time so that you only have to pop it in the oven when the time comes.
  • Not everyone likes their French Toast drowning in syrup! There's an option to add a light maple syrup drizzle, then allow your guests to add more syrup to taste. But now everyone likes syrup, so a dusting of powdered sugar is a an option too.
  • If you're using maple syrup, try for a real 100% maple syrup. Costco's brand is bargain compared to grocery store prices on 100% maple syrup.

FAQ

Can I prep this ahead of time?

Yes, you can prep the French Toast casserole the day before. When you're ready to bake, remove the prepped casserole from the refrigerator. Allow it to warm up on the counter first for 30-60 minutes. Then bake as directed. However, if it's not warmed up enough, you may need to bake it longer.

What type of bread should I use?

Any type you want! Brioche and Challah have a light, softness to them. Sourdough is usually sturdier with a bit of tang. A baguette is dense and chewy. So it depends on the texture that you're going after. You can also mix different types of breads especially if you are trying to use up odds and ends. You know how there are always extra hot dog buns? If you're mixing breads, you can use those too!

I have tart raspberries. How do I balance the tartness ?

If you find your raspberries are too tart, you can add more maple syrup at the end. The sweetness of maple syrup is a perfect balance for tart raspberries.

I like eggy French Toast. Can I add more eggs?

Yes, if you like eggy French Toast, you can add up to 4 more eggs.

I forgot to leave my bread out to harden. What can I do?

If your bread is not stale, you can toast the bread in the oven. Toast it in the oven in a single layer at 300℉ for 15-20 minutes, flipping halfway. Or if you're really rushed, toast at 350℉ for 8-10 minutes, flipping halfway. But watch the bread so that it doesn't start to brown. It just needs to harden.

Close up of a slice of Raspberry Brioche French Toast Casserole on a plate with drips of maple syrup. It is cut so that you can see the different layers in the casserole.

Related

Looking for other breakfast or brunch recipes like this? Try these:

  • 9 Cinnamon Rolls in Cast Iron Pan
    Overnight Cinnamon Rolls
  • Chocolate sweet roll with espresso frosting on plate
    Chocolate Sweet Rolls with Espresso Frosting
  • Top view of lemon raspberry sweet roll on a plate
    Lemon Raspberry Sweet Rolls
  • Overhead photo of Biscoff cinnamon roll on a plate with a bite taken out in front of a partial view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls
    Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls
Overhead photo of baked raspberry brioche French toast casserole in a fancy blue rimmed baking pan

Raspberry Brioche French Toast Casserole

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
This Raspberry Brioche French Toast Casserole layers tart raspberries, creamy goat cheese, crunchy pecans and custard soaked bread that turns golden and tender in the oven. A drizzle of maple syrup ties it all together for a sweet and tangy dish that's both indulgent and refreshingly bright.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 1 hour hr
Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Servings 20

Ingredients
  

  • 1 16-18 ounce loaf of brioche bread stale and cubed
  • 6 large eggs
  • 3 cups whole milk
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 2 6 ounce packages raspberries
  • 4 ounces goat cheese
  • ½ cup pecans chopped
  • 2 tablespoons salted butter, melted optional
  • ¼ cup maple syrup optional
  • powdered sugar for dusting optional

Instructions
 

  • Carefully cut the bread into cubes and leave out on baking sheets overnight to harden. It works best to use a serrated knife and cut each slice of bread into 16 pieces.
  • Spray a 9x13 baking pan with cooking spray.
  • Place half of the cubed bread in the baking pan.
  • Top the bread with all of the goat cheese, half of the raspberries and half of the pecans.
  • Layer on rest of the bread, raspberries and pecans.
  • In a large bowl, beat the eggs with a whisk.
  • Add the milk, brown sugar, vanilla and cinnamon to the eggs and whisk together.
  • Pour the egg mixture evenly into the baking pan, making sure to coat all of the exposed bread cubes.
  • Let it sit for 30 minutes for the bread to soak up the egg mixture.
  • While the bread is soaking up the egg mixture, preheat the oven to 350℉.
  • Before placing in the oven, turn over or push down some of the top pieces of bread to make sure they are coated well with the egg mixture.
  • Cover the baking pan with aluminum foil and bake for 50-60 minutes. Remove the foil after 30 minutes. Bake until the middle is set and the exposed bread is browned.
  • Optional: Once the French Toast casserole is out of the oven, melt 2 tablespoons of butter and brush it over the exposed bread pieces. Drizzle ¼ cup of maple syrup over the top. After serving, guests can add extra syrup or a sprinkle of powdered sugar to taste.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Raspberry Brioche French Toast Casserole
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
45 degree view of a pan of baked raspberry brioche French toast casserole that has one piece missing

Grilled Hash Browns

June 20, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Grilled Hash Browns offer a deliciously smoky upgrade to a classic dish. Crisp on the outside and tender on the inside, the grill adds a deep, charred flavor you don't get from a skillet. They're a hearty side that complements everything from breakfast eggs to juicy backyard burgers.

Overhead view of a partially eaten hash brown next to eggs, toast and parsley garnish

Grilled hash browns are the perfect recipe to make in your outdoor kitchen. Wait, you don't have an outdoor kitchen? That's ok, I don't either. But I do have a grill, and I do love hash browns on the grill. Grilled hash browns are lighter, crispier and have that amazing smoky flavor that only comes from cooking on a grill. They are the perfect way to start a Saturday morning breakfast.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make hash browns: two medium potatoes, salt, pepper, onion powder, garlic powder and paprika
  • Russet potatoes
  • Salt
  • Garlic powder
  • Onion powder
  • Paprika
  • Black pepper

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions

Overhead view of grated potatoes soaking in water

Step 1: Grate the potatoes, put them in a large bowl and cover them with water. Swish them around and then drain the water.

Overhead view of potatoes soaking in water after third rinse

Step 2: Repeat the rinsing and swishing step until the water is clear. The potatoes will feel crisp and no longer coated or slimy. Drain well, squeeze and pat dry. Mix in the spices.

Overhead view of hash brown patties on a grill rack before going on the grill

Step 3: Spray a grill grate or basket with cooking spray. Use ½ cup of potatoes to make each patty about ½ inch thick.

Overhead view of hash brown patties cooking on a grill
  1. Step 4: Cook on the grill on medium high heat for about 7-8 minutes per side.
Close up view of grilled hash brown next to scramble eggs with a bite of hash browns on a fork

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - potatoes are gluten free, so no adjustments are needed.
  • Vegan - this recipe is naturally vegan, so no adjustments are needed.

Equipment

A hand grater or food processor and strainer is needed to grate and strain the potatoes. A gas or charcoal grill is needed to grill the potatoes. You can also use an indoor or electric grill, but you won't get the same smoky flavor that you get with a grill.

Two grilled hash browns on a serving platter

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 5 days.

Next Level Tips

  • If you need a quicker version, you can use fresh, pre-packaged, grated potatoes found in the grocery store's refrigerated section. A typical brand is Simply Potatoes Shredded Hash Browns. They are ready to go with no rinsing needed.
  • If you want the insides to be white-white, then don't skip the rinsing and don't mix in the spices. Sprinkle the spices on top instead. However, I think hash browns taste better with the seasonings mixed throughout. Mix in the spices just before shaping and grilling so that the salt doesn't draw out extra water from the potatoes.
  • For an even smokier flavor, use smoked salt or smoked paprika.
  • If the grill is on, add some grilled garlic bread. Or, if you're making breakfast, just grill your toast. The char adds another level of flavor to your regular toast!

FAQ

Do I have to use russet potatoes?

No, but russet potatoes work really well due to their starch content. After being rinsed, they seem to have the perfect amount of starch left. I've also used red potatoes as that's the kind of potato that I most commonly have on hand. Res potatoes don't contain as much starch so they don't require as much rinsing, but they also don't always crisp up as well as russet potatoes do.

Do I have to rinse the potatoes?

No, but if the starch is not rinsed off, it can oxidize when exposed to air and turn gray. It's harmless and doesn't affect the flavor, but it can affect the texture and it's an unappetizing color. It's not a pretty gray, it's a dull, ugly gray.

Overhead view of a hash brown on a white plate with eggs, toast and parsley next to a coffee cup

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with grilled hash browns:

  • Berry Yogurt Parfait
  • 9 Cinnamon Rolls in Cast Iron Pan
    Overnight Cinnamon Rolls
  • Overhead view of four cinnamon rolls in mini square baking cups on top of a cooling rack.
    Small Batch Cinnamon Rolls
  • Chocolate sweet roll with espresso frosting on plate
    Chocolate Sweet Rolls with Espresso Frosting
Overhead view of hash brown patties cooking on a grill

Grilled Hash Browns

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Grilled hash browns have crispy edges, a tender center and a smoky flavor from the grill. They're a hearty, flavorful side that pairs with anything from breakfast to burgers.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 16 minutes mins
Total Time 26 minutes mins
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Servings 4

Equipment

  • 1 Hand grater or food processor
  • 1 strainer

Ingredients
  

  • 2 medium Russet potatoes shredded
  • 1½ teaspoons salt
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions
 

  • Turn the grill to medium high and preheat for 10 minutes to about 450 degrees.
  • Wash the potatoes and then grate them with a grater or a food processor.
  • Add the grated potatoes to a large bowl and cover with water. Swish the potatoes around and drain with a strainer. Repeat twice more or until the water is clear and the potatoes no longer feel coated. They will feel more crisp once the starch is rinsed off. On the last time, drain very well and press down on the potatoes in the stainer to get all the excess water out.
  • Once the grill is ready, put the drained potatoes back in the large empty bowl and mix in the spices.
  • Line a baking sheet with paper towels (this catches any additional liquid from the potatoes). Spray a grill pan or basket well with cooking spray and place it on top of the paper towels on the baking sheet.
  • Put ½ cup of lightly packed, grated potatoes on to one corner of the grill pan and pat down into a patty about ½ inch thick. Repeat for the 3 other patties.
  • Remove the grill grate or basket from the baking sheet and place it on the grill. Close the lid and cook for 7-8 minutes or until the bottom is golden and crisp.
  • Flip the patties and cook for an additional 7-8 minutes on the second side until the second side is golden and crisp.
  • Remove from the grill and enjoy! Add any additional salt to taste. Potatoes need a lot of salt!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Grilled Hash Browns
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Close up view of grilled hash brown next to scramble eggs with a bite of hash browns on a fork

Grilled Garlic Bread

June 18, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Grilled Garlic Bread is made by brushing slices of crusty bread with garlic butter and grilling them until crisp and slightly charred. Grilling garlic bread creates a smoky, crunchy exterior while the interior stays soft, buttery and infused with a rich garlic flavor. It's an easy side dish that pairs perfectly with pasta, soup, salad and other grilled dishes.

Overhead view of two serving platters with grilled garlic bread using different types of bread. One plate has grilled garlic bread made with a baguette and the other plate has grilled garlic bread using sliced sourdough bread. All bread is garnished with extra salt and fresh parsley.

I love bread. I'm a bread girl. And grilled garlic bread? It's like bread perfection, slightly charred. The exterior charred parts are a perfect flavor and texture contrast to the soft buttery, garlicky interior parts. Anytime we're grilling something that even remotely pairs with garlic bread, it goes on the menu. Especially if we're grilling meat. Meat needs to rest before slicing and grilled garlic bread takes less than five minutes, so the timing is perfect. As soon as the meat comes off, the bread goes on. It's like they were always meant to be the perfect match.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make grilled garlic bread: a baguette, garlic, butter, salt and optional fresh parsley.
  • Bread of choice (ex. baguette, ciabatta or sourdough)
  • Fresh garlic
  • Salted butter
  • Salt
  • Fresh parsley (optional)

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for prepping the garlic bread

Overhead photo of 3 inch pieces of baguette on a cutting board

Step 1: Slice the bread. If you're using a baguette, first slice the baguette in 2 or 3 inch pieces. Then stand each piece on its side and slice down the middle.

Overhead photo of sliced baguette brushed with garlic butter next to a bowl with a pastry brush in the melter garlic butter

Step 2. Melt the butter and mix in the minced garlic. Using a pastry brush, brush the melted garlic butter on to both sides of each piece of bread. Sprinkle salt on the buttered pieces. They are now ready to grill.

A ripped piece of grilled garlic bread on a white plate in front of a serving plate with the rest of the grilled garlic bread

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - to make this recipe gluten free, choose a gluten free bread. Gluten free bread is naturally dense and sturdy, so most gluten free bread will work well for grilled garlic bread.
  • Vegan - to make garlic bread vegan, choose a vegan bread and use a plant based butter. My favorite plant based butter is Miyoko's European Style plant milk butter. It's so good that it's almost better than real butter! And if you haven't tried it, whipped truffle tofu is a next level vegan spread for grilled garlic bread too.

Equipment

To make grilled garlic bread, you'll want to use a gas or charcoal grill for that smoky flavor that comes with a nice char. For non-grilled garlic bread, you could also use an oven, air fryer, cast iron pan on the stove or a panini maker.

Storage

Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 to 3 days.

Overhead view of a serving plate of grilled garlic bread with a nice char garnished with extra salt and fresh parsley

Next Level Tips

  • Always start with a high quality bread that's not too soft. I prefer a baguette cut into larger pieces, sourdough bread or a thicker cut country loaf for grilling.
  • Melted butter is a must so that the butter soaks into the bread and doesn't melt and drip into the grill.
  • When you're grilling garlic bread, place the bread directly on the grates. Skip the aluminum foil or any other barriers in between the bread and the grates. Putting the bread directly on the grates is how we get a really nice char.
  • Want to take your garlic bread to the next level? Serve it with fresh basil pesto or whipped truffle ricotta. So good!
Stacks of grilled garlic bread on sourdough garnished with a little salt and finely cut parsley

FAQ

Can I add anything for extra flavor?

Absolutely! You can add garlic powder, dried minced garlic or garlic salt for extra garlic flavor. Add some smoked salt for an extra smoky flavor. You can also add some finely grated parmesan cheese after you take the bread off the grill.

Can I prepare the bread ahead of time?

Yes, you can prep the bread and then refrigerate it until you're ready to grill.

Do I salt the bread before and after grilling?

Yes! The main salt is added before grilling, but a light dusting afterward enhances the flavor and adds a nice visual touch to the finished bread.

Stacks of grilled garlic bread on sourdough garnished with a little salt and finely cut parsley

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Whipped Ricotta Truffle Oil Dip
    White Truffle Garlic Bread with Whipped Ricotta
  • Close up photo of a bowl of whipped tofu with shopped parsley garnish and a piece of garlic toast dipping into the bowl
    Whipped Tofu with Truffle Garlic Bread
  • Overhead close up view of sliced smoked salmon bruschetta pieces on a cutting board
    Smoked Salmon Bruschetta

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with grilled garlic bread:

  • Close up overhead photo of basil pesto in a small, glass jar surrounded by loose basil leaves, a spoon on top of a spoon rest, and small slices of baguette topped with basil pesto.
    Simple Basil Pesto
  • Overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.
    Southwestern Cobb Salad
  • Side view of a cut Tiramisu Cheesecake on a cake stand next to a shaker of cocoa powder
    Tiramisu Cheesecake
Overhead close up photo of a stack of grilled garlic bread with nice grill char marks and garnished with extra salt and fresh parsley on a serving plate

Grilled Garlic Bread

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Grilled garlic bread is the ultimate side. It's crispy, smoky and loaded with rich garlic butter flavor. It's also quick to make and pairs perfectly with pasta, salads, soups and grilled meats.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 7 minutes mins
Cook Time 2 minutes mins
Total Time 9 minutes mins
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Servings 8

Ingredients
  

  • 1 baguette (or 8+ slices of sourdough or ciabatta)
  • 3 tablespoons butter melted
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon salt + more to taste
  • parsley finely chopped

Instructions
 

  • If the grill is not already on, preheat the grill on high for 10 minutes.
  • Microwave the butter for 20-30 seconds until it's melted. Stir the minced garlic into the melted butter. Use a pastry brush and brush both* sides of the bread. Sprinkle the salt evenly over the bread.
  • Place the first side down directly on the grates of the hot grill. Close the lid and check after 30 seconds. If the char is at the desired level, flip the bread to other side. If not, close the lid and check again after another 30 seconds and then flip.
  • Grill on the second side for 30 seconds with the lid closed. Check and if the char is at the desired level, remove the garlic bread from the grill. If not, close the lid and check again after another 30 seconds and then remove.
  • Optional: top with a dusting of salt and finely chopped parsley.

Notes

*For a softer bite, you can butter and grill only one side of the bread. 

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Grilled Garlic Bread
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
A ripped piece of grilled garlic bread made with sourdough bread on a white plate in front of a serving plate with the rest of the grilled garlic bread

Smoked Salmon Bruschetta

June 12, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Smoked salmon bruschetta is a fresh and elegant appetizer that layers toasted bread with smoked salmon, basil pesto and whipped goat cheese. Each bite delivers a rich mix of savory and tangy flavors. It's simple to make and perfect for appetizers, parties or brunch.

Overhead view of three rustic pieces of toasted bread topped with basil pesto, whipped goat cheese, smoked salmon and garnished with red onion slices and micro greens. Each piece of bread is cut into four pieces to make smoked salmon bruschetta.

My daughter's favorite restaurant is currently Postino, and she gets a bruschetta board every time. Like every single time. For their bruschetta boards, you get to pick up to four different flavors. For her, at least two of her choices are always the smoked salmon bruschetta. Always. So that served as my inspiration for this. There are a few differences though. I put the capers in the whipped cheese layer and microgreens on top instead. I also used goat cheese for the whipped cheese layer. I think Postino's uses feta cheese, but most soft cheeses taste great with smoked salmon. I love that they took bruschetta to a new level by using regular bread and then slicing it into smaller pieces. How genius! Using regular sized bread makes prepping bruschetta so much easier.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make smoked salmon bruschetta: smoked salmon, basil pesto, goat cheese, capers, lemon juice, onion, olive oil and micro greens.
  • Smoked salmon
  • Basil pesto (homemade or store bought)
  • Goat cheese
  • Capers
  • Lemon juice
  • Olive oil
  • Red onion
  • Microgreens

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for assembling the bruschetta

Step one of smoked salmon bruschetta: spread basil pesto on toasted bread

Step 1: Toast the bread and allow it to cool. Spread a layer of basil pesto on top of the cooled toast.

Step two of smoked salmon bruschetta: spread whipped goat cheese over basil pesto

Step 2: Spread a layer of whipped goat cheese on top of the basil pesto.

Step three of smoked salmon bruschetta: layer smoked salmon over the whipped goat cheese and garnish with sliced red onion and micro greens

Step 3: Next, top with smoked salmon, sliced red onion and microgreens.

Slice smoked salmon bruschetta into smaller pieces

Step 4: Slice into four smaller pieces and enjoy!

Photo of three pieces of smoked salmon bruschetta made using rustic bread on a plate in front of a mini wooden board with smoked salmon bruschetta made using a baguette with yet another board with smoked salmon bruschetta in the background.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - use your favorite gluten free bread.
  • Goat cheese - instead of goat cheese, you could use another soft cheese that can be whipped like feta, ricotta, mascarpone or cream cheese.

Variations

  • Bread - I first recommend using a high quality bread, sliced on the thicker side. After that, you can really use any sturdy bread. The bread I use is an artisan country style bread. But you could use a baguette, ciabatta, sourdough or any bread with a thick crust and dense interior.
Close up view of one piece of smoked salmon bruschetta topped with sliced red onion and micro greens. It is made using rustic bread and cut into four smaller pieces.

Equipment

A mini food processor is helpful, but not required, to make the whipped goat cheese layer.

Storage

Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator overnight. For smoked salmon, it's best to eat it the day you open the package or save any leftovers only until the following day.

Next Level Tips

  • All good bruschetta starts with a good bread. Whether it's homemade, from a bakery or farmer's market, or even gluten free, start your bruschetta with a good bread. If you're in the greater Phoenix area, Noble Bread and Proof Bread are my current local favorites. You can't go wrong with either. If you make your own bread, slice it a little thicker for bruschetta.
  • Try making your own simple basil pesto. Or if you want to skip that step this time, Costco has a great Kirkland Signature brand of Basil Pesto.
  • Grill your bread! Grilling takes toasting bread to a whole new level. It adds that smoky grill flavor and umami boost. Grill over medium high heat for 1-2 minutes on each side.
  • For traditional bruschetta, you would rub each piece of toasted bread with a clove of garlic. This adds another level of flavor to smoked salmon bruschetta too! If you've never done this before, just brush the garlic clove across the top and edges of the bruschetta. You're essentially micro grating the garlic straight on to the toasted bread, so you don't have to brush too long or hard to get a great garlic flavor. Brushing too hard or for too long will give you an intense garlic flavor.
  • If you like capers, add more to the top as garnish. So yum!
Photo of three pieces of smoked salmon bruschetta made using rustic bread on a plate in front of a mini wooden board with smoked salmon bruschetta made using a baguette with yet another board with smoked salmon bruschetta in the background.

FAQ

What type of microgreens should I use?

Your favorite kind! I currently love arugula, broccoli and cilantro microgreens. You can also garnish the bruschetta with fresh herbs like dill or chives. If you can't find microgreens near you, I would add more capers as a garnish on top.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Whipped Ricotta Truffle Oil Dip
    White Truffle Garlic Bread with Whipped Ricotta
  • Bread dipper seasoning in oil on plate with bread and olive oil in the background
    Bread Dipping Seasoning
  • Grey plate with appetizer size pieces of baked grilled cheese sandwiches with tomato dipping sauce
    Grilled Cheese Appetizer
  • Close up photo of a bowl of whipped tofu with shopped parsley garnish and a piece of garlic toast dipping into the bowl
    Whipped Tofu with Truffle Garlic Bread

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with smoked salmon bruschetta:

  • Close up of portobello mushroom parmesan on pasta on a plate
    Portobello Mushroom Parmesan
  • Close up of Marinara Sauce in ladle
    Easy Homemade Marinara Sauce
  • Side view of a cut Tiramisu Cheesecake on a cake stand next to a shaker of cocoa powder
    Tiramisu Cheesecake
  • Close up overhead photo of basil pesto in a small, glass jar surrounded by loose basil leaves, a spoon on top of a spoon rest, and small slices of baguette topped with basil pesto.
    Simple Basil Pesto
Overhead view of three rustic pieces of toasted bread topped with basil pesto, whipped goat cheese, smoked salmon and garnished with red onion slices and micro greens. Each piece of bread is cut into four pieces to make smoked salmon bruschetta.
Overhead close up view of sliced smoked salmon bruschetta pieces on a cutting board

Smoked Salmon Bruschetta

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Smoked salmon bruschetta is made with toasted bread, basil pesto, whipped goat cheese and smoked salmon. It's an elegant yet easy dish to make. Perfect for crowds, parties and brunch.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes mins
Cook Time 8 minutes mins
Total Time 28 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 16

Equipment

  • 1 Mini food processor or blender

Ingredients
  

  • 6-8 slices high quality bread thickly sliced
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil for toasting the bread
  • ½ cup basil pesto homemade or store bought
  • 4 ounces goat cheese
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil for the whipped goat cheese
  • 2 tablespoons capers
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • 8 ounces smoked salmon
  • ½ of small red onion thinly sliced
  • microgreens (ex. arugula or broccoli) as garnish

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the oven to 400℉.
  • If using homemade pesto, make it and set it aside.
  • Make the whipped goat cheese. Place the goat cheese, capers, lemon juice and one tablespoon of olive oil in a small food processor and blend until creamy. Set aside.
  • Lightly brush each side of bread with olive oil. Place on a baking sheet in a single layer. Bake for about 8 minutes, flipping halfway. If you're using smaller pieces of bread like a baguette, bake for 6 minutes and flip halfway. Allow to cool.
  • Add a layer of basil pesto to the top of each piece of toasted bread.
  • Next, add a layer of whipped goat cheese on top of the pesto. Spread it lightly so that is doesn't mix too much with the pesto.
  • Add the smoked salmon in a single or double layer depending on preference.
  • Top with desired garnish such as sliced red onions, micro greens and capers.
  • Use a sharp knife to cut into smaller slices.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Smoked Salmon Bruschetta
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Close up view of one piece of smoked salmon bruschetta topped with sliced red onion and micro greens. It is made using rustic bread and cut into four smaller pieces.

Simple Basil Pesto

June 12, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Homemade basil pesto is fresh, vibrant and full of flavor. It's quick and easy to make, ready in just about 5 minutes, and a versatile addition to any meal. It's perfect for pizza, pasta, bruschetta, sandwiches or as a dip.

45 degree angle photo of basil pesto in a small, glass jar surrounded by loose basil leaves, a spoon on top of a spoon rest, and small slices of baguette topped with basil pesto and a lemon.

Homemade fresh basil pesto is incredibly delicious. It's one of those sauces that tastes good on just about anything. My current favorite way to use it is as part of a smoked salmon bruschetta or just by itself on little oiled and toasted slices of baguette. But, I'm going to be honest, I could truly just eat it with a spoon straight out of the jar. That and homemade salted caramel sauce. So delicious all on their own.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make basil pesto: fresh basil, pine nuts, parmesan cheese, olive oil, garlic, fresh lemon juice and salt.
  • Fresh basil
  • Pine nuts
  • Parmigiano Reggiano cheese
  • Olive oil
  • Garlic
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Salt

See recipe card for quantities.

Substitutions

  • Pine nuts - you can substitute another nut or roasted pepitas (green pumpkin seeds) for the pine nuts
  • Vegan - to make this vegan, you can use a vegan parmesan cheese or omit the parmesan cheese.
  • Parmigiano Reggiano - if you don't have Parmigiano Reggiano cheese or it's too expensive, Grana Padano cheese is a good substitute.
  • Gluten free - this recipe has no gluten, so no adjustments are needed.
Overhead view of glass jar of homemade basil pesto next to baguettes topped with pesto and loose basil leaves

Equipment

A food processor or blender is needed to make this simple pesto recipe. You can also use a mortar and pestle to crush the ingredients and then incorporate the oil. A mortar and pestle is the traditional way of making pesto.

Storage

Store homemade basil pesto in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 to 7 days.

Next Level Tips

  • To bring out the nutty flavor in the pine nuts, you can toast them first. Toast them in a single layer in a skillet for 2-4 minutes over medium low heat. Don't use any oil or cooking spray. Stir frequently. Remove them from the heat and from the pan when they are starting to turn golden brown and smell nutty.
  • A mortar and pestle is the traditional way of making pesto. A mortar and pestle releases the flavors and oils from the basil and garlic more gently than a food processor or blender. I prefer the ease of a blender, but if you have a mortar and pestle, give it a try. Crush all of the ingredients except the olive oil in the mortar with the pestle. Then slowly drizzle in the olive oil and stir until it forms a thick paste.
  • Get creative for the uses of basil pesto. We love it as a sauce on pizza or as a spread for sandwiches. And it's great as a pasta sauce too.
  • To take basil pesto to the next level, use basil straight from the garden. Basil is usually very easy to grow, and it grows well in the ground or in pots.
45 degree view of a glass jar of homemade bail pesto on a plate next to two pieces of baguette with pesto on top as well as loose basil leaves on the side

FAQ

What is Parmigiano Reggiano cheese?

Parmigiano Reggiano cheese is 'Parmesan cheese' that is only made in certain regions in Italy, only with specific ingredients, and it must be aged for a minimum of one year. The term Parmesan is not regulated in the U.S., so Parmesan cheese is very generic. Parmesan cheese can be made anywhere, without specific ingredients and is often aged for less than a year. Parmigiano Reggiano has a stronger, richer and nuttier flavor with a more crumbly texture. Parmigiano Reggiano typically costs more than Parmesan as it's imported, but it's worth it! Especially if you're looking for high quality ingredients with a heavenly taste. However, you can also use Parmesan cheese for this simple basil pesto.

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to use homemade pesto for:

  • Overhead close up view of sliced smoked salmon bruschetta pieces on a cutting board
    Smoked Salmon Bruschetta
Overhead view of gigli shaped Italian pasta tossed with pesto
Close up overhead photo of basil pesto in a small, glass jar surrounded by loose basil leaves, a spoon on top of a spoon rest, and small slices of baguette topped with basil pesto.

Simple Basil Pesto

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Homemade basil pesto is bright, flavorful and bursting with freshness. It takes just about 5 minutes to prepare and adds a delicious touch to any dish. Use it on pizza, pasta, bruschetta, sandwiches or even as a dip. It's incredibly versatile and easy to make.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Total Time 5 minutes mins
Course Appetizer, Sauce
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 12

Equipment

  • 1 food processor or blender

Ingredients
  

  • 4 ounces fresh basil* stems removed
  • ½ cup pine nuts
  • ½ cup Parmigiano Reggiano cheese grated
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice fresh squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 2 cloves garlic
  • ½ cup olive oil extra virgin

Instructions
 

  • Add all of the ingredients except the olive oil into a food processor or blender and pulse several times until all of the basil leaves, pine nuts and garlic have been coarsely chopped into smaller pieces. Scrape down the sides.
  • Blend on low and then slowly and continuously drizzle in the olive oil. Continue blending until a slightly chunky consistency is reached. Add more salt to taste. For an even smoother texture, you can add additional olive oil. Serve or refrigerate.

Notes

If you are using basil from the garden, 2 packed cups of basil leaves is roughly equivalent to 4 ounces.  

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Basil Pesto
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of glass jar of homemade basil pesto next to baguettes topped with pesto and loose basil leaves

Tiramisu Cheesecake

June 7, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 2 Comments

Tiramisu cheesecake blends the rich yet subtle flavors of tiramisu with the texture of cheesecake for the best of both worlds. Flavors of espresso, cocoa powder and mascarpone cheese combined with a smooth texture take this cheesecake to the next level. It's creamy, delicious and deeply satisfying.

Side view of a cut Tiramisu Cheesecake on a cake stand next to a shaker of cocoa powder

Have you seen all my cheesecake recipes? There's everything from a baked Thin Mints cheesecake to a no bake strawberry crunch cheesecake. It's fair to say I love cheesecake. Really, truly love cheesecake. I also love Tiramisu. I just don't love making Tiramisu and usually only make it for family and friends whose favorite dessert is Tiramisu. Cheesecakes so much easier for me to make, so this is my compromise. All the amazing flavors of Tiramisu with the texture and ease of a cheesecake.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for the crust

Ingredients needed for Tiramisu cheesecake crust: graham crackers, salted butter, white sugar and espresso powder
  • Graham crackers
  • Salted butter
  • White sugar
  • Espress powder

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the filling

Ingredients needed for Tiramisu cheesecake filling: cream cheese, white sugar, eggs, espresso, espresso powder and vanilla
  • Cream cheese
  • White sugar
  • Eggs
  • Vanilla
  • Brewed espresso or coffee
  • Espresso powder

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the topping

  • Mascarpone cheese
  • Heavy whipping cream
  • Powdered sugar
  • Cocoa powder

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for decorating the tiramisu cheesecake

Overhead photo of undecorated, baked Tiramisu cheesecake

Step 1: Bake the cheesecake, allow to cool completely and then chill for a minimum of 6 hours but preferably overnight.

Overhead photo of Tiramisu cheesecake covered with Mascarpone whipped cream

Step 2: Remove the springform sides. Make the mascarpone whipped cream and spread it over the chilled cheesecake.

Overhead photo of Tiramisu cheesecake after it's been dusted with cocoa powder

Step 3: Dust with cocoa powder. Dusting is done most easily with a sifting tool or any kind of shaker.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - you can substitute two cups of gluten free graham cracker for the regular graham crackers. However, different crackers have different fat content, so make sure to do the 'squeeze test'. Once you've finished mixing the crust, pick up a handful and squeeze it tight. If it mostly stays together in your hand, it's perfect. If it crumbles and won't stay together, add another tablespoon of melted butter and test again. If it is super wet and is loose, add more crushed crackers.
  • Espresso and espresso powder - you can substitute strongly brewed coffee for the espresso and additional coffee grinds for the espresso powder. If you don't make any type of coffee at home, you can buy instant coffee. Brew a cup of instant coffee and use additional instant coffee grinds to substitute for the espresso powder.
  • Mascarpone cheese - we use mascarpone cheese in the topping because of the specific sweet flavor of that cheese, so there really isn't a good substitute as we already have the flavor of cream cheese in the cheesecake. If you can't find mascarpone cheese (try Trader's Joes or by the fancier cheeses in the deli section), then I would suggest leaving it out and making the whipped cream topping without it.

Variations

The main flavors of Tiramisu are coffee, mascarpone and cocoa powder. Ladyfingers are next, but they don't have a ton of flavor in themselves. However, you can substitute 1 cup of ground ladyfingers for half of the graham crackers in the crust without making any other changes to the crust recipe. Or, you could also put ladyfingers in the cheesecake; however, I do think that takes away from some of the lovely cheesecake texture. To add ladyfingers inside the cheesecake, first make the filling. Then add two cups of filling to the crust. Brew a double shot of espresso and add it to a small rectangular container with short sides. Do a very quick dip of each side of the ladyfinger and add the ladyfinger in a single layer on top of the first layer of filling. Add rest of the filling on top and bake as directed.

Overhead view of a slice of tiramisu cheesecake on a plate in front of another slice on a plate and the cut Tiramisu cheesecake on a cake stand

Equipment

A stand or hand mixer is helpful for making cheesecakes.

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 to 7 days.

Next Level Tips

  • New to making cheesecakes? Tiramisu cheesecake is a great starter cheesecake for those who find decorating cheesecakes intimidating. The top of most tiramisu is flat and dusted with cocoa powder, so I've carried that design over to this cheesecake. Anyone (even you!) can make a fancy decorated cheesecake, and I hope that you'll trust me and make one of my other cheesecakes that look fancier. My pistachio cheesecake even has a great link for beginning piping techniques. But if you're new, this one is a perfect place to start, and I'm happy you're here.
  • Always use room temperature cream cheese and room temperature eggs for cheesecakes. For this tiramisu cheesecake, use room temperature mascarpone for the whipped topping too.
  • Allow the cheesecake to cool in the oven without touching it for two hours. Then, move the springform pan to a cooling rack and allow the cheesecake to come to room temperature before placing it in the refrigerator. Then, refrigerate for at least 6-8 hours; however, overnight is best.
  • It's best to make cheesecakes at least the day before you need them. At a minimum, they should refrigerate overnight. But, cheesecakes are even better on the third day! They are fully cooled and the flavors have had time to meld. Don't believe me? Try it next time. Day 1 = bake cheesecake. Day 2 = try cheesecake and enjoy. Day 3 = try cheesecake and really enjoy!
Very close up photo of the inside layers of the tiramisu cheesecake: the crust, the filling, the mascarpone whipped cream and the dusting of cocoa powder.

FAQ for baking cheesecakes

Do I have to par-bake the crust?

No, but I always recommend par-baking the crust. By par-baking the crust, it helps set the crust so that the crust is nice and crisp and not soggy. A crisp crust has a better texture and is a better contrast to the creamy cheesecake filling. Also, a crisp crust also allows you to easily move the cheesecake off of the springform pan and onto a cake board, a cake taker or a serving plate. A crumbly crust is a mess to move and no one wants that!

How do I remove the bottom of the springform pan?

The reason we pack the graham cracker crust tightly, but not too tightly, into the springform pan and par-bake the crust is so that we can easily remove the bottom of the springform pan without the crust crumbling. After the rim of the springform pan is off, take a cake lifter (or metal pizza peel or a very large spatula) and gently slide it in between cheesecake crust and bottom of springform pan. Don't lift the cheesecake up in the air (especially if the whole crust is not supported). Rather, use the cake lifter to slide the cheesecake off of the springform bottom onto the serving plate. You can buy a cheap cake lifter at a Hobby Lobby type store in the baking section or online. If you're using a large metal spatula, run it under the entire outer edge first before using it to slide the cheesecake.

What is the moat method?

The very best way to avoid cheesecake cracks is to bake at a lower temperature and use the moat method. In short, the moat method is where you place your springform pan inside of a cake pan and then put the cake pan in a roasting pan with water. This avoids leaky aluminum foil and protects the springform pan from direct heat. I also describe the moat method in more detail, with photos, in my post about pumpkin spice cheesecake.

Side view of a Tiramisu cheesecake on a dessert stand with a slice missing so that you can see the inside layers of the cheesecake

FAQ for Tiramisu Cheesecake

Can I use coffee liquor?

Yes, coffee liquor is often used in Tiramisu. If you want to add some coffee liquor to the cheesecake filling, you can add 2 tablespoons at the same time that you add the espresso and vanilla.

What kind of cocoa powder should I use?

My very favorite cocoa powder is Valrhona brand. You can find it on Amazon, at Whole Foods in the bulk section and some specially stores. After that, I recommend the brands that start with a G: Guittard and Ghirardelli. Usually you can find one of the G brands in a regular grocery store.

Overhead view of a tiramisu cheesecake topped with cocoa powder, with a slice missing, on a cake stand surrounded by loose cocoa powder

Related

Looking for a no bake cheesecake instead? Try these:

  • Overhead photo of No Bake Nutella Cheesecake topped with Nutella drizzle, hazelnut crumbs, Nutella whipped cream and Kinder Buenos
    No Bake Nutella Cheesecake with a Gluten Free Hazelnut Oreo Crust
  • Overhead view of an entire no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries
    No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake
  • Top view of Gluten Free No Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake
    No Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake with a Gluten Free Crust
Side view of a cut Tiramisu Cheesecake on a cake stand next to a shaker of cocoa powder

Tiramisu Cheesecake

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Tiramisu cheesecake combines the rich espresso, cocoa, and mascarpone flavors of a classic tiramisu with the smooth, creamy texture of cheesecake. This indulgent dessert is both delicious and deeply satisfying, offering the best of both worlds in every bite.
5 from 1 vote
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 30 minutes mins
Cook Time 1 hour hr 6 minutes mins
Cooling and chilling time 9 hours hrs
Total Time 10 hours hrs 36 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 14

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer

Ingredients
  

The crust

  • 13 full graham cracker sheets
  • 6 tablespoons salted butter
  • 2 tablespoons white sugar
  • 1 teaspoon espresso powder

The filling

  • 4 blocks cream cheese (8 ounces per block) room temperature
  • 1 cup white sugar
  • 4 large eggs room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons espresso cooled
  • 1 teaspoon espresso powder
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla

The topping

  • 8 ounces mascarpone cheese room temperature
  • 1 cup heavy whipping cream
  • ½ cup powdered sugar
  • ½ tablespoon cocoa powder

Instructions
 

Make the crust

  • Preheat the oven to 325°. Spray an 8 or 9 inch springform pan with cooking spray and set aside.
  • Add the graham crackers to the food processor and grind until the crackers are mostly fine crumbs. You should have about 2 cups of crushed graham crackers.
  • Mix the graham cracker crumbs, melted butter, 2 tablespoons of white sugar and 1 teaspoon of espresso powder together in a small bowl until well combined and all the cracker crumbs are coated with butter.
  • Add the graham cracker mixture to the springform pan. Even out the crust and pack it down with a small pastry roller or the bottom of a measuring cup with medium pressure. It should be packed firmly but not too hard.
  • Bake for 6 minutes and set aside to cool.

Make the filling

  • Brew the espresso (or coffee). Put 2 tablespoons of the brewed coffee in a small bowl and add 1 teaspoon of espresso powder. Stir and allow to cool.
  • Place the room temperature cream cheese into the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until creamy and all lumps are gone. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
  • Add the white sugar to the cream cheese in the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until well combined. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
  • Next, add the brewed espresso with the espresso powder and the vanilla to the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until well combined. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
  • Add the eggs to the mixing bowl one at a time. Mix on low speed until each egg is combined before adding the next egg. Between eggs, scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.

Bake and cool the cheesecake

  • Add the filling to the springform pan. Place the springform pan in a larger cake pan. Fill a roasting pan with one inch of water. Carefully add the cake pan with springform pan into roasting pan. [Or, alternatively, if you're not using the moat method, add the springform pan wrapped very well in aluminum foil into roasting pan water bath.]
  • Bake at 325° for about 60 minutes until the center is mostly set. Then, turn off the oven and open the oven door to start the cooling process. Leave it alone for two hours. After two hours, remove the springform pan from the oven and let it cool on a cooling rack until it's room temperature.
  • When the cheesecake is at room temperature, run a knife around the edges to loosen the cheesecake from the sides. Then, cover and refrigerate for a minimum of 6 hours but preferably overnight or longer.
  • After 6 hours, or preferably the next day, remove the rim. Also, remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan if so desired.

Make the mascarpone whipped cream and decorate

  • Add the room temperature mascarpone, one cup of heavy whipping cream and ½ cup powdered sugar to the mixing bowl. Use the whisk attachment if you have one. Mix on medium high to high until stiff peaks form.
  • Spread the whipped mascarpone cheese on top of the chilled cheesecake. You can also pipe it on in fun designs.
  • Use a shaker or sifter to add a layer of cocoa powder. It can be a light dusting or you can completely cover the cheesecake with a light layer of cocoa powder.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Tiramisu Cheesecake
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Side view of a slice of tiramisu cheesecake with a bite taken out in front of another slice of cheesecake next to a dessert stand with the rest of the tiramisu cheesecake on top

Shrimp Burrito Bowls

June 4, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Shrimp Burrito Bowls pack all the bold, vibrant flavors of a burrito without the tortilla. Loaded with seasoned shrimp, rice, beans, veggies, and toppings, they're naturally gluten free and endlessly customizable. Quick, easy and satisfying, deconstructed shrimp burritos make the perfect weeknight dinner or meal prep option.

45 degree angle view of white plate with a shrimp burrito bowl made with seasoned shrimp, cilantro rice, black beans, diced avocado, cherry tomatoes, and corn garnished with cilantro and chipotle almond drizzle. Additional chipotle almond dressing, limes, a bowl of tortilla chips, a napkin and a fork surround the plate.

I love chopping vegetables. There's something so soothing about it. Give me a glass of wine and a good podcast, and I would happily chop vegetables for hours. But, the reality of life is that there is rarely enough time to spend hours chopping vegetables and listening to podcasts every day. So that's where burrito bowls and buddha bowls come in. With this recipe you still get some chopped vegetables, but shrimp burrito bowls are quick and easy. It's a deconstructed shrimp burrito in a bowl. And there is something really soothing about deconstructing things too.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make shrimp burrito bowls: shrimp, taco seasoning, garlic powder, onion powder, black beans, rice cilantro, lime, tomatoes and corn.
  • Shrimp
  • Avocado
  • Cherry tomatoes
  • Sweet corn
  • Black beans
  • Long grain rice of choice (ex. Jasmine)
  • Cilantro
  • Lime
  • Homemade taco seasoning (or store bought) plus garlic powder and onion powder
  • Optional chipotle almond dip (or store bought like Bitchin' Sauce or Trader Joe's)

See recipe card for quantities.

Mexican shrimp burrito bowl with shrimp, avocado, corn, white rice, tomatoes and black beans garnished with cilantro and chipotle dressing drizzle.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - this recipe is naturally gluten free, so no adjustments are necessary.
  • Vegan - omit the shrimp or substitute pan-fried (or air fryer) tofu or sweet potatoes for the shrimp.
  • Different veggies - any cold or hot veggies can be added. Roasted sweet red, yellow or orange peppers work great. Got extra zucchini from the garden? If you slice it really thinly, you don't even need to cook it first. Just quarter it, slice it thinly and add it in. Broccolini, cauliflower, the options are endless.
  • Rice - you can use any rice for these shrimp burrito bowls. Jasmine rice is my favorite, all-around white rice. You can use another long grain white rice, brown rice or wild rice though.
  • Dressing - if you want to make a vinaigrette dressing, you can use the chipotle lime vinaigrette from my Southwestern Cobb Salad recipe.

Variations

  • Spicy - to make this bowl spicy, top with a spicy blender salsa or add thinly sliced jalapeños as a garnish.
  • Different proteins - you can certainly change up the protein. Leftover chicken, carne asada, carnitas, pan fried tofu. So many options!
  • Quick, quick version - for an even quicker version, you can use rotisserie chicken and microwave packets of cilantro rice.
Close up 45 degree angle view of shrimp burrito bowl with shrimp, avocado, corn, white rice, tomatoes and black beans garnished with cilantro and chipotle dressing drizzle.

Storage

Store any leftover shrimp burrito bowls in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

Next Level Tips

  • If you want an even lighter dinner or meal prep with fewer carbs, you can use cauliflower rice or even turn this recipe into a Mexican shrimp salad by substituting your favorite mixed greens for the rice.
  • Cheese and shrimp can make a strange combination, but if you want to take these shrimp burrito bowls to the next level, try Cojita cheese. It's salty and crumbly and pairs great with shrimp.
  • Rice cookers make the best rice, but there's not always room in the kitchen for single use appliances. If you don't have a rice cooker, the next best way to cook rice is in an Instant Pot. If you don't have an Instant Pot, follow the directions on the package of rice or use microwaveable packets.
  • Serve with some Pico de Gallo or quick blender salsa for an extra layer of flavor.
  • Shrimp burrito bowls are great for meal prep too!

FAQ

What type of shrimp to use?

I love the peeled and de-veined frozen shrimp at Costco. They taste great ,and usually they're well priced. But don't forget to check the grocery store butcher section. Sometimes shrimp goes on sale. This is also an option if you are making this bowl for one and only want a small amount of shrimp. You can also use precooked shrimp, but precooked shrimp can be rubbery so that's not recommended.

Why are we adding garlic powder and onion powder to the taco seasoning?

We add more garlic powder and onion powder to the taco seasoning to make it taste more like a burrito than a taco. If you want to use straight taco seasoning, that works too!

45 degree angle view of Mexican shrimp burrito bowl with shrimp, avocado, corn, white rice, tomatoes and black beans garnished with cilantro and chipotle dressing drizzle. Limes can be seen in the background.

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with shrimp burrito bowls:

  • Bowl with Pico de Gallo and cilantro in background
    Pico de Gallo
  • Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa made with fire roasted tomatoes on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips
    Restaurant Style Blender Salsa
  • Close Up of Chipotle Almond Dip
    Chipotle Almond Dip
Overhead view of white plate with a shrimp burrito bowl made with seasoned shrimp, cilantro rice, black beans, diced avocado, cherry tomatoes, and corn garnished with cilantro and chipotle almond drizzle. Additional chipotle almond dressing, tortilla chips, a napkin and a fork surround the plate.

Shrimp Burrito Bowls

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Shrimp Burrito Bowls are bursting with bold flavors-seasoned shrimp, rice, beans, veggies, and all your favorite toppings, no tortilla needed. Quick, easy, and naturally gluten free, they're a satisfying dinner or meal prep that you can easily customize.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 12 minutes mins
Total Time 27 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 4

Ingredients
  

  • 1 cup uncooked rice of choice ex. Jasmine
  • ¼ cup cilantro finely, chopped plus more for optional garnish
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lime juice plus rest of lime cut in wedges for garnish
  • 1 pound shrimp thawed, deveined and peeled
  • 1 tablespoon taco seasoning homemade or store bought
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 can black beans rinsed
  • 2 cups canned or cooked corn
  • 2 cups cherry tomatoes halved or quartered
  • 2 medium avocados diced
  • chipotle almond dip optional homemade or store bought
  • salt to taste

Instructions
 

Cook the cilantro rice

  • If you're using a long grain white rice and a rice cooker or an Instant Pot, add 1 cup of uncooked rice and cover with 1 and ½ cups of water. Turn on the rice cooker or set the Instant Pot to the Rice option. For brown or wild rice, cook according to the package instructions.
  • When the rice is done, turn off the rice cooker or release the pressure on the Instant Pot and turn off. Allow the rice to cool for several minutes and then fluff the rice and stir in ¼ cup of finely chopped cilantro, 1 tablespoon of lime juice and salt to taste. Save any remaining chopped cilantro and lime wedges for garnish.

Cook the shrimp

  • Pat the thawed shrimp dry.
  • Combine the taco seasoning, garlic powder and onion powder and sprinkle over both sides of the shrimp.
  • Heat a large skillet to medium high heat. When the pan is hot, add a tablespoon of olive oil and swirl it around. Add the shrimp in a single layer to the oiled skillet. Cook for 2 minutes on the first side. Flip and cook 1 to 3 minutes on the second side. Cook just until all the shrimp turn opaque and pink. Immediately remove the shrimp from the pan (to prevent further cooking) and set them aside.

Prep the veggies and prepare the bowls

  • Drain and rinse the beans. If using canned corn, drain the corn. Dice the avocado and slice the cherry tomatoes in half or quarters.
  • Add ¼ of each of the shrimp, rice, beans, corn, avocado and tomatoes to each bowl.
  • Drizzle the optional chipotle almond dip over the bowls. Most store bought chipotle almond dip is naturally on the thin side, perfect for drizzling. [If using homemade chipotle almond dip, add ½ cup of chipotle almond dip to a small bowl. Add 1 teaspoon of water and stir well. Continue adding water until the desired consistency is reached.] Top with additional cilantro as garnish. Serve with any leftover lime wedges. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Burrito Bowls, Shrimp Burrito Bowls
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of white plate with a shrimp burrito bowl made with seasoned shrimp, cilantro rice, black beans, diced avocado, cherry tomatoes, and corn garnished with cilantro and chipotle almond drizzle. Additional chipotle almond dressing, a bowl of salsa, tortilla chips, a napkin and a fork surround the plate.

Pistachio Cheesecake

May 30, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Pistachio cheesecake is a luscious blend of creamy, tangy cheesecake with the subtle, nutty sweetness of real pistachios. With its buttery graham cracker and pistachio crust and a velvety pistachio-infused filling, each bite feels indulgent and luxurious. Topped with whipped cream and a sprinkle of crushed pistachios, it's an elegant dessert that's simply delicious.

Side view of a pistachio cheesecake, with a slice missing, sitting on a desert pedestal

My husband loves pistachios. And I mean loves pistachios. We lived in Europe for four years, and I swear the only gelato he ever ate was pistachio. That kind of love. We also love cheesecake, so I've been making him pistachio cheesecake for many years. When I first started making it, there were no online recipes. And so I've made it many different ways. I've even put spinach in sometimes for a little more green coloring which wasn't pretty, but that was also during a phase where I didn't use any artificial food coloring. And you know what? You can't taste the spinach at all. Now, there are a lot more pistachio cheesecakes recipes online, but many of them have extra steps liking making pistachio butter. Not fun. And, sometimes, the simplest ways are the best. So this version is a simple, delicious pistachio cheesecake. And no spinach.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for the crust

Ingredients need to make a pistachio cheesecake crust: regular graham crackers, pistachios, white sugar and salted butter
  • Graham crackers
  • Pistachios
  • Salted butter
  • White sugar

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the cheesecake filling

Ingredients needed for pistachio cheesecake filling: cream cheese, eggs, white sugar, pistachio nut crumbs and almond extract
  • Cream cheese
  • White sugar
  • Eggs
  • Pistachio nut crumbs
  • Almond extract

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the cheesecake topping

Ingredients needed for pistachio cheesecake topping: heavy whipping cream, powdered sugar and pistachio nut crumbs
  • Heavy whipping cream
  • Powdered sugar
  • Pistachio nut crumbs

See recipe card for quantities

Instructions for packing the pistachio crust

Unbaked graham cracker and pistachio crust

After mixing, place the pistachio crust ingredients in the springform pan. Then, even out the crumbs and pack down with a mini pastry roller or the bottom of a measuring cup. With medium pressure, continue packing down until the crust is set and looks like this. I also recommend par-baking the crust. Packing the crust down and par-baking creates a crisp crust that has a great texture and is easily moved off the springform pan.

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - you can substitute 1 and ½ cups of gluten free graham cracker for the regular graham crackers. However, different crackers have different fat content, so make sure to do the 'squeeze test'. Once you've finished mixing the crust, pick up a handful and squeeze it tight. If it mostly stays together in your hand, it's perfect. If it crumbles and won't stay together, add another tablespoon of melted butter and test again. If it is super wet and is loose, add more crushed crackers.
  • Almond extract - you can substitute pistachio extract for the almond extract. But I would not recommend using vanilla in this case because almond and pistachio extracts are more in line with the sweet, nutty flavor that we are going for.
Overhead photo of a partial view of a pistachio cheesecake, with a slice missing, on top of a dessert pedestal

Variations

  • Decorations on top - the decorations on top of the cheesecake don't need to be perfect. To pipe the whipped cream, I used a Wilton 1M tip. If you're just starting out with piping, the Wilton 1M is one of the most universal piping tips. You can do a lot of different designs with the 1M tip. I was looking to try something new and found this great YouTube video from Cakes by MK explaining different piping methods: Beginner's Piping Tutorial - 6 Designs, 1 Piping tip. She does a really good job of explaining how to pipe frosting on a cake. The same principles apply with whipped cream and cheesecake.

Equipment

A stand or hand mixer is needed for this recipe. Also, a food processor or blender is helpful so that you don't have chop nuts with a knife.

Storage

Store any leftover pistachio cheesecake in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 to 7 days.

Side view of a single slice of pistachio cheesecake on a plate with a bite resting on a fork on the plate

Next Level Tips

  • Always use room temperature cream cheese and room temperature eggs for cheesecakes. 
  • The very best way to avoid cheesecake cracks is to bake at a lower temperature and use the moat method. In short, the moat method is where you place your springform pan inside of a cake pan and then put the cake pan in a roasting pan with water. This avoids leaky aluminum foil and protects the springform pan from direct heat. I also describe this in more detail, with photos, in my post about pumpkin spice cheesecake.
  • Allow the cheesecake to cool in the oven without touching it for two hours. Then, move the springform pan to a cooling rack and allow the cheesecake to come to room temperature before placing it in the refrigerator.
  • Cheesecakes need time to set in the refrigerator after baking. Try to refrigerate for at least 6-8 hours; however, overnight is best.
Overhead view of one slice of pistachio cheesecake on a plate with a bite resting on a fork on the plate.

FAQ

What type of pistachios should I use?

Most pistachios come as raw and unshelled or roasted and shelled. You can use either. But, I find that Costco's shelled and roasted pistachios are the best bang for your buck, they taste great, and it's much easier not to have to shell them. However, if you use raw and unshelled, I would add ¼ teaspoon of salt to the cheesecake filling.

Why par-bake the crust?

I always recommend par-baking the crust. By par-baking the crust, it helps set the crust so that the crust is nice and crisp and not soggy. A crisp crust has a better texture and is a better contrast to the creamy cheesecake filling. Also, a crisp crust also allows you to easily move the cheesecake off of the springform pan and onto a cake board, a cake taker or a serving plate. A crumbly crust is a mess to move and no one wants that!

What is the moat method?

The moat method creates a barrier between the springform pan and the direct heat of the oven. Kind of like in the olden days when castles used moats to protect the castles from invaders! So, in the moat method, we place the springform pan into a larger cake pan before putting the cake pan into a larger roasting pan with the water bath. This creates a moat (of air) that separates the springform pan from the cake pan and the water bath. So no more water seeping into your cheesecake pan! I highly recommend using this method as it works great.

How do I remove the bottom of a springform pan?

The reason we pack the graham cracker crust tightly, but not too tightly, into the springform pan is so that we can easily remove the bottom of the springform pan without the crust crumbling. After the rim of the springform pan is off, take a cake lifter (or metal pizza peel or a very large spatula) and gently slide it in between cheesecake crust and bottom of springform pan. Don't lift the cheesecake up in the air (especially if the whole crust is not supported). Rather, use the cake lifter to slide the cheesecake off of the springform bottom onto the serving plate. You can buy a cheap cake lifter on Amazon or like at a Hobby Lobby type store in the baking section. If you're using a large metal spatula, run it under the entire outer edge first before using it to slide the cheesecake.

Side view of the side and back of one slice of pistachio cheesecake in front of a cake stand with the rest of the cheesecake on a dessert stand in the background.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead photo of No Bake Nutella Cheesecake topped with Nutella drizzle, hazelnut crumbs, Nutella whipped cream and Kinder Buenos
    No Bake Nutella Cheesecake with a Gluten Free Hazelnut Oreo Crust
  • Overhead view of an entire no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries
    No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake
  • Overhead photo of whole Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake
    Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake
  • Individual slice of pumpkin cheesecake with whipped topping in shape of a rosette
    Pumpkin Spice Cheesecake
Overhead view of a pistachio cheesecake topped with whipped heavy cream and pistachio crumbs

Pistachio Cheesecake

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Pistachio cheesecake blends creamy cheesecake with the subtle sweetness of real pistachios. Set on a buttery, pistachio graham cracker crust and topped with whipped cream and crushed pistachios, it's a rich, elegant dessert that's simply irresistible.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 25 minutes mins
Cook Time 1 hour hr 6 minutes mins
Cooling and chilling time 8 hours hrs
Total Time 9 hours hrs 31 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 14

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer
  • 1 blender or food processor

Ingredients
  

The crust

  • 1 sleeve graham crackers (9 full crackers per sleeve)
  • ½ cup pistachios ground
  • 6 tablespoons salted butter melted
  • 2 tablespoons white sugar

The filling

  • 4 blocks cream cheese (8 ounces per block) room temperature
  • 4 large eggs room temperature
  • 1 cup white sugar
  • ¼ cup pistachios ground
  • 1 teaspoon almond extract

The toppings*

  • 2 cups heavy whipping cream*
  • ½ cup powdered sugar*
  • ½ cup pistachios ground

Instructions
 

Creating the pistachio nut crumbs

  • Since we will be using the pistachio nut crumbs in the crust, in the filling and on top of the cheesecake, it is best to grind the pistachios into the nut crumbs all at once. Place 1 and ¼ cups of pistachios in a blender or food processor and grind into small nut crumbs. Set aside ½ cup for the crust, ¼ cup for the filling and ½ cup to be used for decorating the cheesecake.

Make the crust

  • Preheat the oven to 325°. Spray an 8 or 9 inch springform pan with cooking spray and set aside.
  • Add the graham crackers to the food processor and grind until the crackers are mostly fine crumbs.
  • Mix the graham cracker crumbs, ½ cup of pistachio nut crumbs, melted butter and 2 tablespoons of white sugar together in a small bowl until well combined and all the cracker crumbs are coated with butter.
  • Add the graham cracker mixture to the springform pan. Even out the crust and pack it down with a small pastry roller or the bottom of a measuring cup with medium pressure. It should be packed firmly but not too hard.
  • Bake for 6 minutes and set aside to cool.

Make the filling

  • Place the room temperature cream cheese into the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until creamy and all lumps are gone. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
  • Add the white sugar to the cream cheese in the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until well combined. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
  • Next, add the pistachio crumbs and almond extract to the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until well combined. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
  • Add the eggs to the mixing bowl one at a time. Mix on low speed until each egg is combined before adding the next egg. Between eggs, scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.

Bake and cool the cheesecake

  • Add the filling to the springform pan. Place the springform pan in a larger cake pan. Fill a roasting pan with one inch of water. Carefully add the cake pan with springform pan into roasting pan. [Or, alternatively, if you're not using the moat method, add the springform pan wrapped very well in aluminum foil into roasting pan water bath.]
  • Bake at 325° for about 60 minutes until the center is mostly set. Then, turn off the oven and open the oven door to start the cooling process. Leave it alone for two hours. After two hours, remove the springform pan from the oven and let it cool on a cooling rack until it's room temperature.
  • When the cheesecake is at room temperature, run a knife around the edges to loosen the cheesecake from the sides. Then, cover and refrigerate for a minimum of 6 hours but preferably overnight or longer.
  • After 6 hours, or preferably the next day, remove the rim. Also, remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan (see FAQ if needed) if so desired and top with your favorite topping or a whipped cream topping.

Make the whipped cream topping (optional)

  • Put the metal mixing bowl in the refrigerator or freezer until cold while you're gathering ingredients.
  • Add the heavy whipping cream and powdered sugar to the mixing bowl and mix on medium-high to high speeds until stiff peaks form. The time this takes depends on how cold the bowl and cream are as well as the speed of the mixing. Plan on 5-8 minutes but watch it carefully once it starts to fluff. You can stop the mixer at any time and check for stiff peaks. If the consistency is not at stiff peaks then continue mixing and checking.
  • Pipe or spoon the whipped cream topping on to the top of the cheesecake.
  • Sprinkle the remaining pistachio crumbs over the whipped topping and exposed cheesecake. If there are any remaining pistachio crumbs, you can press them into the sides of the cheesecake just like you would do if you were finishing a cheeseball.
  • Serve immediately or refrigerate. Enjoy!

Notes

*This batch of whipped cream topping makes enough for you to cover the whole cheesecake. If you are familiar with piping and just want to do the edging, you can use 1 cup of heavy whipping cream and ¼ cup of powdered sugar. If you are unsure about piping and only want to do the edging, use 1 and ½ cups of heavy whipping cream and ¼ cup plus 2 tablespoons of powdered sugar. 

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Pistachio Cheesecake
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Single slice of pistachio cheesecake on a plate with a fork in front of a cake stand with the rest of the pistachio cheesecake

Southwestern Cobb Salad

May 29, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Southwestern Cobb Salad is a bold twist on a classic favorite and is packed with vibrant flavors and hearty ingredients. Grilled chicken tops a bed of mixed greens, creamy avocado, sweet corn, black beans and juicy cherry tomatoes. A zesty chipotle lime vinaigrette brings it all together with a spicy, tangy kick. It's a satisfyingly delicious entrée disguised as a salad.

Front view of a plate of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette next to a napkin and fork with cilantro, cut limes and additional cilantro lime vinaigrette in the background.

Cobb salad was never at the top of my list. I think it was the processed chicken cubes and heavy ranch dressing that threw me off. But once I started making it myself with fresh grilled chicken and skipping the ranch, everything changed. And the best part? You don't have to give up the traditional Cobb you love. This Southwestern Cobb salad is just a fun, flavorful alternative to a classic favorite!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for the Southwestern Cobb salad

Ingredients needed for making a southwestern Cobb salad: mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, tomatoes, sweet corn, red onions, shredded cheese and cilantro for garnish.
  • Mixed greens of choice
  • Cooked chicken
  • Avocado
  • Cherry tomatoes
  • Black beans
  • Sweet corn
  • Shredded Mexican cheese
  • Red onions
  • Cilantro

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the Chipotle Lime Vinegarette

Ingredients for chipotle lime vinaigrette: lime juice, avocado oil, canned chipotles in adobo sauce, rice vinegar, garlic, agave, salt and cumin.
  • Lime juice
  • Neutral oil (like avocado or grapeseed oil)
  • Canned chipotles
  • Rice vinegar
  • Garlic
  • Agave (or honey)
  • Salt
  • Cumin

Substitutions

  • Gluten free - this salad is naturally gluten free, so no adjustments are necessary.
  • Vegan - for a vegan salad, omit the grilled chicken and cheese. That still leaves you with a great veggie Cobb salad. You can also use vegan substitutes for those ingredients as well.
Very close-up overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.

Variations

  • Different meat - you could also use sliced flank steak, pork tenderloin, fish or shrimp to top the salad.
  • Different cooking method for the meat - you can use your favorite method to cook the chicken instead of grilling it. You could also substitute precooked grilled chicken, canned chicken or rotisserie chicken if you're short on time. No judgement here!
  • Spicier vinaigrette - to make the chipotle lime vinaigrette spicier, add another canned chipotle and ¼ teaspoon of chipotle chili powder.

Equipment

If you're grilling the chicken, you'll need an outdoor grill or an indoor electric grill. A blender or food processor is also helpful for the chipotle lime vinaigrette.

Storage

Store any extra leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. Any lettuce that has dressing on it doesn't last long, so store any leftover, dressed Southwestern Cobb Salad in the refrigerator just overnight. Store any extra Chipotle Lime Vinaigrette in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 5 to 7 days.

Front view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette with cilantro, cut limes and additional cilantro lime vinaigrette in the background.

Next Level Tips

  • I like to use cherry tomatoes for the convenience sake. But if you have regular tomatoes growing in the garden, use those. There's nothing like a fresh tomato!
  • If you want the salad to be even closer to a traditional Cobb salad, you can add bacon bits and hard boiled eggs. For two salads, plan on 2-4 pieces of chopped, thick-cut bacon and 2-4 hard boiled eggs. You could also make extra hard boiled eggs and bacon, then you'll have breakfast for the next morning.
  • To save time, you can use bottled chipotle ranch dressing. Or if you have chipotle almond dip in your refrigerator, you can turn it into a salad dressing by thinning it with water. Chipotle almond dip is something that's always in my refrigerator. At a minimum, I use it as a taco sauce for lunch tacos multiple times a week.
  • For this salad, I buy one package of thinly closed chicken breasts. But I only use two of the breasts, one per salad. What to do with the rest? You could sprinkle some homemade taco seasoning on the other breasts and grill those at the same time so that you have the chicken already made for tacos or another meal. Or you could buy one chicken breast from the butcher and ask them to slice it horizontally into two thinly sliced breasts.
  • I like to store my homemade salad dressings in little jars. It's easy to pour and also easy to shake if the dressing starts to separate.
  • Southwestern Cobb Salad is also amazing for meal prep. Just assemble the salads on prep day but hold the dressing until the day you're eating it.
Front view of a plate of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette with cut limes and additional cilantro lime vinaigrette in the background.

FAQ

What type of cheese should I use?

Cheese that you shred yourself always tastes best. If you shred your own cheese, try a cheddar. If you're buying pre-shredded cheese, I like to use a Mexican blend with the largest shreds. Cojita and Queso Fresco, although different textures, would also work well with this salad.

What are thinly sliced chicken breasts?

A thinly sliced chicken breast is when one regular chicken breast is sliced in half horizontally to make two thinly sliced chicken breasts. They are typically sold in packages right next to the regular chicken breasts. You can also buy a chicken breast from the butcher and ask them to slice it in half horizontally for you.

What should I do if I have extra ingredients?

If you have extra canned corn or canned beans, you can pile them on your salad or save them for a different salad. They would work great in a build-your-own-salad. You can also refrigerate any extra canned chipotles for another salad dressing or for Chipotle Almond Dip.

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with Southwestern Cobb Salad:

  • Bowl with Pico de Gallo and cilantro in background
    Pico de Gallo
  • Close Up of Chipotle Almond Dip
    Chipotle Almond Dip
  • Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa made with fire roasted tomatoes on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips
    Restaurant Style Blender Salsa
  • Side view of Paloma mocktail with a Tajin rim garnished with lime and a grapefruit slice with lime slices and a grapefruit in the background
    Paloma Mocktail
Overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.

Southwestern Cobb Salad

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Southwestern Cobb Salad is a bold, flavorful twist on a classic Cobb. Grilled chicken, avocado, corn, black beans, cherry tomatoes and cheese sit atop fresh mixed greens. And it's all tied to together with a zesty chipotle lime vinaigrette to make a hearty, satisfying entrée salad.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes mins
Cook Time 8 minutes mins
Total Time 28 minutes mins
Course Main Course, Salad
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 2

Equipment

  • 1 Small food processor or blender
  • 1 Outdoor or indoor grill

Ingredients
  

Entree salad ingredients for two:

  • 4 cups mixed salad greens
  • 2 thinly sliced chicken breasts grilled
  • 1 large avocado diced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 1 cup canned black beans rinsed
  • 1 cup canned (or cooked) corn kernels
  • 1 cup mixed Mexican cheese shredded
  • ¼ cup red onion thinly sliced
  • cilantro for garnish
  • salt and pepper for chicken

Chipotle Lime Vinaigrette

  • ½ cup fresh lime juice
  • ½ cup neutral oil (like avocado or grapeseed oil)
  • 2 tablespoons rice vinegar (or apple cider vinegar)
  • 2 medium chipotle peppers (canned)
  • 1 tablespoon liquid from the canned chipotle peppers
  • 1 garlic clove
  • 1 teaspoon agave (or honey)
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Instructions
 

Make the Chipotle Lime Vinaigrette

  • Add all vinaigrette ingredients, except the neutral oil, to a small food processor or blender. Blend on medium until smooth and creamy.
  • Slowly drizzle in the neutral oil (or add it in stages), blending until it's fully emulsified and incorporated into the dressing.

Make the grilled chicken

  • Turn the grill on high and let the grill heat up for 10 minutes.
  • Sprinkle salt and pepper on both sides of each thinly sliced chicken breast.
  • Turn the burners down between medium and medium high and then add the thinly sliced chicken breasts.
  • Grill the thinly sliced chicken breasts for 3-4 minutes per side until the internal temperature reaches 165℉. Thicker breasts will take longer.
  • Allow the grilled chicken to rest and cool for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

Put the salad together

  • Prep the vegetables and rinse the black beans.
  • Add two cups of mixed greens of your choice to a salad plate or bowl.
  • Add half of the cut tomatoes, diced avocados, black beans, corn and cheese sections over the mixed greens on each salad. Or you can just sprinkle them over the mixed greens.
  • Top each salad with sliced onions and one sliced chicken breast. Garnish with cilantro. Drizzle vinaigrette across each salad. Enjoy!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Southwestern Chicken Salad
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Front view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette with cilantro and additional cilantro lime vinaigrette in the background.

No Bake Nutella Cheesecake with a Gluten Free Hazelnut Oreo Crust

May 21, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

No Bake Nutella Cheesecake is the perfect blending of a luscious Nutella and cream cheese filling with a crisp, gluten free Oreo hazelnut crust. This rich, chocolatey dessert comes together with minimal effort. It's the perfect cheesecake for anyone who loves the classic pairing of chocolate and hazelnuts and also wants a gluten free crust.

Side view of a No Bake Nutella Cheesecake topped with Nutella drizzle, hazelnut crumbs, Nutella whipped cream and Kinder Bueno bar pieces

Nutella is a brand name for a classic hazelnut spread enhanced with cocoa. Yes, it has a lot of sugar. Let's just acknowledge that, have a moment of silence and move on. Nutella is something we can occasionally truly enjoy, but we don't have to eat it everyday. Unless, you're in Europe. Then you might just find Nutella at the continental breakfast, and you try telling a 9 year old they can't eat Nutella for breakfast. I failed that morning. In fact, here's proof of just how much I failed. My daughter also found the largest piece of bread ever made in which to put her Nutella on.

Child eating a piece of Nutella covered bread

But I digress. So, have you tried roasted hazelnuts straight out their package? Roasted hazelnuts naturally have a fantastic hint of chocolate flavor, so it's really only natural that we pair hazelnuts and chocolate together. And Nutella did a great job of capturing that hazelnut flavor, enhancing it with chocolate and turning it into a spreadable form. Nutella lends itself perfectly to a no bake cheesecake.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for the Gluten Free Oreo Crust

Photo of ingredients needed for an Oreo gluten free crust: gluten free Oreos, roasted hazelnuts, salted butter
  • Gluten Free Oreos
  • Roasted hazelnuts
  • Salted butter

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for the Nutella Cheesecake Filling

Photo of ingredients needed for the Nutella cheesecake filling: Nutella, cream cheese, heavy whipping cream and powdered sugar
  • Nutella
  • Cream cheese
  • Powdered sugar
  • Heavy whipping cream

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for Decorating the Nutella Cheesecake

Photo of ingredients for decorating the Nutella cheesecake: Nutella, heavy whipping cream, powdered sugar, hazelnuts, cocoa powder and Kinder Buenos
  • Nutella
  • Heavy whipping cream
  • Powdered sugar
  • Roasted hazelnuts
  • Cocoa powder
  • Kinder Bueno bar (not gluten free)

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for decorating the cheesecake

Decorating cheesecakes is easier than you think it is! Just break it down into smaller steps.

Decorating a Nutella Cheesecake step 1: remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan and place on a wakeboard or serving plate.
  1. Prep the cheesecake. Remove the sides of the springform pan. Optionally, remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan and slide it onto a serving plate or cake board.
Decorating a Nutella Cheesecake step 2: make a Nutella drizzle and pipe it on top of the cheesecake.
  1. Add the Nutella drizzle. Heat ½ cup of Nutella in the microwave for 30 seconds. Add it to a decorator bottle or piping bag and pipe it on to the top of the cheesecake in the design of your choice.
Decorating a Nutella Cheesecake step 3: grind hazelnuts and add a chocolate nut crumb on top of the piped Nutella drizzle.
  1. Add the hazelnut crumbs. Put ¼ cup roasted hazelnuts and ¼ teaspoon of cocoa powder in a food processor and blend until the hazelnuts are coated in the cocoa powder and are the size of nut crumbs. Sprinkle the nut crumbs on top of the Nutella drizzle.
  1. Add the whipped cream and candy pieces. Whip together one cup of heaving whipping cream, ½ cup powdered sugar and 1 tablespoon of Nutella until stiff peaks have formed. It takes 3-5 minutes at high speed. Pipe or spoon the whipped cream on the cheesecake and top with optional Kinder Bueno bar (not gluten free) pieces.

Substitutions

  • Gluten Free Oreos - you can substitute other sandwich cookies of your choice. Other sandwich cookies may have a different fat content though, so you'll want to make sure your crust is not too dry. Start by making the crust as described below with the different sandwich cookies. Once you've finished mixing the crust, pick up a handful and squeeze tight. If it mostly stays together in your hand, it's perfect. If it crumbles and won't stay together, add another tablespoon of melted butter and test again. However, we don't need a lot of butter to hold together a no bake crust.

Equipment

A hand or stand mixer is needed to make the cheesecake filling. A small food processor is helpful to grind the hazelnuts, but those can be chopped with a knife as well.

Storage

Store the no bake Nutella cheesecake in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Photo of slice of no Bake Nutella cheesecake on a white plate with a fork in front of the rest of the Nutella Cheesecake with scattered hazelnuts

Next Level Tips

  • I like to top my desserts so that the decoration gives a clue to the flavor of the dessert. Nutella cheesecake is brown similar to chocolate cheesecake. So to give the expectation of hazelnut flavor, I like to add Kinder Bueno bar pieces to the top. Kinder Bueno bars contain hazelnuts and are light and delicious. You can also use Ferrero Rocher hazelnut chocolates. I just prefer Kinder Buenos as they have a lighter texture. Kinder chocolates are everywhere these days too. A lot of grocery stores even carry Kinder Buenos with all the other candies by the cash registers. Kinder Buenos and Ferrero Rocher hazelnut chocolates are not gluten free.
  • Decorating a cheesecake is easy when you think about it one step at a time. See the instructions for the Nutella cheesecake decorations above. You also don't have to complete all steps. You can stop at any step or skip some steps.
  • For decorating the cheesecake in the photos, I used an Ateco 4 tip for the drizzle and a Wilton 1M tip for the Nutella whipped cream.
  • We only add 1 tablespoon of Nutella for the whipped cream on top because we're mostly using it for coloring and a light flavoring, and we want the texture to be light.
Overhead partial view of No Bake Nutella Cheesecake with a slice taken out

FAQ

Can I use other sandwich cookies?

Yes, you can use other sandwich cookies, even regular Oreos that contain gluten if you want a regular crust. Just count out the same number of cookies. Not all sandwich cookies have the same fat content though, so just check to make sure your crust is not too dry. Once you've finished mixing the crust, pick up a handful and squeeze. If it mostly stays together in your hand, it's perfect. If it crumbles and won't stay together, add another tablespoon of melted butter and test again.

Do I have to make a Nutella ganache for the drizzle?

No, melted Nutella works great as a drizzle all by itself. There's no need to create an extra step of making a ganache. Just microwave the Nutella for about 30 seconds, just until it drips well. Then, put it in a decorator bottle or piping bag and pipe it on. You can also use a spoon to dribble on the drizzle.

What size springform pan should I use?

I prefer 8 inch springform pans for no bake cheesecakes and 9 inch springform pans for baked cheesecakes, but you can use either.

Can I use non roasted hazelnuts?

Yes, but roasting brings out the chocolate flavor in hazelnuts. I highly recommend roasted hazelnuts.

Related

Looking for other no-bake cheesecakes? Try these:

  • Overhead view of an entire no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries
    No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake
  • Close up photo of single serving jar of keto mini lemon cheesecake
    Mini No Bake Lemon Cheesecake (Keto)
  • Top view of Gluten Free No Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake
    No Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake with a Gluten Free Crust
Overhead photo of No Bake Nutella Cheesecake topped with Nutella drizzle, hazelnut crumbs, Nutella whipped cream and Kinder Buenos

No Bake Nutella Cheesecake with a Gluten Free Hazelnut Oreo Crust

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
No Bake Nutella Cheesecake blends a creamy Nutella and cream cheese filling with a crisp, gluten free Oreo hazelnut crust. Rich, chocolatey and easy to make. Perfect for chocolate hazelnut lovers seeking a gluten-free treat.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Chill and decorating time 6 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time 6 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 12

Equipment

  • 1 Stand mixer or hand mixer
  • 1 Food processor optional

Ingredients
  

Crust

  • 14 gluten free Oreos
  • ½ cup chopped roasted hazelnuts
  • 3 tablespoons salted butter melted

Filling

  • 24 ounces cream cheese room temperature
  • 1 cup Nutella
  • 1 cup heavy whipping cream
  • ½ cup powdered sugar

Toppings

  • ¼ cup Nutella for drizzle
  • ¼ cup roasted hazelnuts
  • ¼ teaspoon cocoa powder
  • 1 cup heavy whipping cream
  • ¼ cup powdered sugar
  • 1 tablespoon Nutella for whipped cream

Instructions
 

Make the crust

  • Spray an 8 or 9 inch springform pan with cooking spray.
  • Add 14 gluten free Oreos (insides included) and ½ cup hazelnuts into a food processor and grind into smaller pieces.
  • Microwave 3 tablespoons of salted butter just until melted, 15-30 seconds. Mix the butter into the Oreo mixture until the butter is evenly distributed.
  • Add the crust mixture to the springform pan. Even it out and then press very firmly into the pan with a flat bottom of a measuring cup.

Make the filling

  • Add the room temperature cream cheese to a mixing bowl and mix on low speed until the cream cheese is light and fluffy with no lumps remaining. Approximately 2-3 minutes.
  • Add 1 cup of Nutella to the mixing bowl and mix on low until the Nutella and cream cheese are fully combined.
  • Add the heavy whipping cream and powdered sugar to the mixing bowl and mix on medium high to high until light and fluffy. Approximately 2-3 minutes.
  • Pour the cheesecake filling on top of the crust and even out the top with a spatula.
  • Refrigerate for a minimum of 6 hours but preferably overnight.

Decorate the cheesecake

  • Run a knife around the outside of the springform pan and then remove the ring.
  • If using a cardboard cake board or a serving plate, remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan with a cake lifter by gently sliding the cheesecake from the springform pan bottom on to the cake board or serving plate while supporting the underside of the cheesecake.
  • Microwave ¼ cup of Nutella for 20-30 seconds, just until it will drip. Add it to a decorator bottle or piping bag (or use a spoon) and drizzle across the cheesecake. [If you would like a lot of drizzle, use ½ cup of Nutella instead.]
  • In a food processor, grind ¼ cup of hazelnuts and a ¼ teaspoon of cocoa powder until the hazelnuts are coated in chocolate and the nuts are the size of a crumb. [You can also chop them with a knife.] Sprinkle across the cheesecake over the drizzle.
  • Add the heavy whipping cream, powdered sugar and Nutella to a mixing bowl. Preferably use the whisk attachment and whisk on medium high to high until medium to stiff peaks form. Be patient. It may take 3-5 minutes. [If you want a lot of Nutella whipped cream, you can double the ingredients.] Pipe or spoon on the Nutella whipped cream and top with the Kinder Bueno candy bar pieces if desired (Kinder Bueno bars are not gluten free.)
  • Serve immediately or refrigerate!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword No Bake Nutella Cheesecake
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Paloma Mocktail

May 19, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

A Paloma Mocktail is a refreshing twist on the classic Mexican Paloma cocktail. It's still the light and refreshing drink we all love but without the alcohol. With bright grapefruit, zesty lime, and sparkling fizz, it's perfect for any time you want something light, refreshing and citrusy.

Side view of Paloma mocktail with a Tajin rim garnished with lime and a grapefruit slice with lime slices and a grapefruit in the background

One of the best parts of summer used to be enjoying a refreshing cocktail on the patio outside in the early evening. Before it gets too hot. Before the bugs come out. A time to relax just before dinner or just after dinner. I don't want to miss those moments, but I really don't want all the alcohol either. I'm also not really a fan of the word mocktail either, but it fits. And a Paloma mocktail just fits too.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make a Paloma Mocktail: nonalcoholic tequila, grapefruit sparkling water, grapefruit, limes, Tajin and salt.
  • Non-alcoholic tequila
  • Grapefruit sparkling water
  • Lime juice
  • Seltzer water
  • Tajin
  • Salt
  • Agave (optional)

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for adding Tajin to the rim

Tajin on a plate with a glass turned upside down on it dipping in the Tajin. Another empty glass with a Tajin on the rim in the background

Step 1: Add the Tajin or salt (or a mix) to a small plate. Step 2: Wet the rim of the drink glass by dunking it in a small bowl of water or under the kitchen faucet. Step 3: Dip the wet rim of the glass into the Tajin or salt and twirl around until the desired amount is on the rim.

Substitutions for Grapefruit Sparkling Water

  • Fresh grapefruit juice plus seltzer - I love making this zero proof Paloma with fresh grapefruit juice and seltzer. Have you eaten fresh grapefruit straight off the tree? It's so sweet and insanely delicious, nothing like the ones in the grocery store. I got some from my neighbor a few months ago, and I swear I ate 4 the first day. They were that good! You can easily substitute 2 ounces of fresh squeezed grapefruit juice and 4 (or more) ounces of seltzer for the grapefruit sparkling water
  • Grapefruit soda - another option is to use a grapefruit soda like Squirt, diet Squirt, Jarrito grapefruit soda or Jarritos Zero Sugar grapefruit soda. Be mindful of the sugar contents for the non-diet sodas though.
  • Mixer - if you want to imitate a sweetened bar or restaurant style Paloma, you can use a premade mixer like Q Mixer in Sparkling Grapefruit. It does have quite a lot of sugar and the color is weird, but it's another option.

Storage

Any unfinished drinks can be covered and stored in the refrigerator overnight.

Side view of Paloma mocktail with a Tajin rim garnished with lime and a grapefruit slice with lime slices and a grapefruit in the background

Next Level Tips

  • I recommend using a salt rim, a Tajin rim or a mixed Tajin and salt rim. A lot of non-alcoholic brands of spirits add citric acid to give it that 'bite' of regular alcohol. And salt helps balance the citric acid. This is important because citrus fruits also have citric acid and citrus flavored sparkling sodas often contain citric acid too. Tajin also gives the Paloma mocktail a little spice which also helps balance the citric acid. When the citric acid is more balanced, a drink tastes a lot better which reduces or eliminates the need to add sugar to balance the acidity. Agave syrup is listed as optional in this recipe. Personally, I don't add agave syrup to my Paloma mocktails, but I also don't like overly sweet drinks either. I'll save my sugar for my desserts, thank you.
  • Just use water to wet the rim of the glass. Tajin and salt both stick just fine with water. You can use a lime wedge to wet the rim of the glass, but that can be sticky, messy and very lime-y. Water is perfect.
  • You can use more or less grapefruit sparking water, but I find 6 ounces works great. Then you can make 2 Paloma mocktails for every can of grapefruit sparkling water.
  • I love lime. A quick squeeze of lime adds a nice flavor. Start with a quick squeeze and work your way up to half a lime.

FAQ

What brand of zero proof tequila should I use?

Use your favorite brand! My favorite, so far, is Ritual brand zero proof tequila alternative. It tastes good, and it smells so much like regular tequila.

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this Paloma mocktail:

  • Bowl with Pico de Gallo and cilantro in background
    Pico de Gallo
  • Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa made with fire roasted tomatoes on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips
    Restaurant Style Blender Salsa
  • Fish Tacos on Plate with Cilantro in background
    Air Fryer Fish Tacos
  • Overhead view of Southwestern Cobb Salad made with mixed greens, grilled chicken, black beans, avocado, cherry tomatoes, sweet corn, shredded cheese, sliced red onions, topped with cilantro lime vinaigrette.
    Southwestern Cobb Salad
Side view of Paloma mocktail with a Tajin rim garnished with lime and a grapefruit slice with lime slices and a grapefruit in the background

Paloma Mocktail

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
The Paloma Mocktail is a fresh, zero proof spin on the classic Mexican cocktail. Bursting with citrus flavor, it is light, refreshing and perfect for any occasion.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Total Time 5 minutes mins
Course Drinks
Cuisine Mexican
Servings 1

Ingredients
  

  • ½ tablespoon Tajin optional
  • ½ tablespoon salt optional
  • 6 ounces grapefruit sparkling water
  • 2 ounces non-alcoholic tequila
  • lime for a quick squeeze of juice* and garnish slice
  • grapefruit for a quick squeeze of juice** and garnish slice
  • 1 teaspoon agave optional

Instructions
 

  • If using a Tajin rim, salt rim or a mixed Tajin and salt rim, add the Tajin and/or salt to a small plate. Wet the rim of the glass with water and then dip the rim of the glass into the Tajin or salt and twirl until the desired amount is on the rim of the glass.
  • If using ice, add the desired amount of ice next.
  • Next, add the non alcoholic tequila followed by the grapefruit sparking water. If using agave syrup, add it next and stir. Follow with a splash of grapefruit and lime juices and garnish with any desired lime or grapefruit slices.

Notes

*If you're not sure how well you like fresh lime juice,  start with a quick squeeze. You can also add more, up to a half of a lime. 
**If you're not sure how well you like fresh grapefruit juice, start with a quick squeeze. You can also add more, up to 2 ounces. 

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Paloma Mocktail
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Side view of Paloma mocktail with a Tajin rim garnished with lime and a grapefruit slice with another Paloma mocktail and lime slices in the background

Restaurant Style Blender Salsa

May 14, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

If you're looking for an easy salsa recipe that tastes amazing, it doesn't get easier than Restaurant Style Blender Salsa. Restaurant style means the salsa is usually made with canned tomatoes, has a mild to medium spice level and has a smooth yet slightly chunky texture. And it doesn't get any easier than throwing all your ingredients in a blender and pulsing a few times to end up with a delicious blended salsa.

Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa with a spoon sticking on a decorative plate full of corn tortilla chips. Blue corn tortilla chips and cut limes are in the background.

Ask people what they love about Mexican restaurants, and the free chips and salsa would be really high on the list. Many restaurants are now starting to charge for chips and salsa though, but we still order it anyway. Why? Because well-made salsa is so good. Now you can make your own though! Blender salsa is my favorite condiment too. Yes, it's perfect for tortilla chips, but it's also great for wraps, bowls, most Mexican foods and even potatoes and scrambled eggs!

We use canned fire roasted tomatoes in restaurant style blender salsa to make it quick and easy. But, if you are looking for a fresh tomato salsa recipe, try my Pico de Gallo salsa.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed for restaurant style blender salsa: canned fire roasted diced tomatoes, canned green chilis, onion, jalapeño, lime juice, garlic, cilantro, apple cider vinegar and salt.
  • Canned fire roasted tomatoes
  • Canned mild green chilis
  • Onion
  • Garlic
  • Jalapeños
  • Cilantro
  • Lime juice
  • Apple cider vinegar
  • Salt

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions

Overhead view of onion and jalapeño cut into large chunks for blender salsa

Step 1: Rough chop the onion and jalapeño.

Blender salsa in a blender at the stage where it has been pulsed but it's still chunky

Step 2: Pulse the blender several times before blending.

Step 3: After pulsing, blend on medium until all the large chunks are gone and the texture is smooth but slightly chunky. Don't over-blend. Cover and chill.

Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa made with fire roasted tomatoes on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips

Step 4: Enjoy!

Salt

We can't make salsa without talking about salt. When we make food at home, we use a lot less salt than restaurants use. But there are a few foods that just need a lot of salt, like tomatoes and potatoes. No one wants to eat french fries without salt, and no one wants to eat salsa without salt either. Fire roasted tomatoes are the best canned tomatoes to use for blended salsa, and it's very difficult to find unsalted fire roasted tomatoes. So we're going to start with regular, fire roasted tomatoes and add even more salt. Why? We can make homemade salsa look like restaurant style salsa without a lot of salt, but we can't make it taste like restaurant style salsa without a lot of salt.

Spice levels

This blender salsa is written to have a restaurant style salsa texture, flavor and spice level. Everyone has differing sensitivities to hot peppers, but here are some basic guidelines on how to adjust the spiciness of this blender salsa recipe:

  • Mild - use only one jalapeño
  • Mild to Medium - make the recipe as written
  • Solid Medium - add one more jalapeño pepper
  • Medium to Hot - add one more jalapeño and one habanero pepper
  • Solid Hot - add one more jalapeño and two habanero peppers.
Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa with a spoon sticking out next to regular and blue corn tortilla chips

Substitutions

  • Apple cider vinegar - if you don't have apple cider vinegar, you can substitute a rice vinegar which also works really well. Vinegar is often a secret ingredient to making salsas pop, but if you don't have vinegar or don't want to add it, you can substitute more lime juice. Vinegars and lime juice are both acidic like tomatoes, but they are less acidic than tomatoes and help bring down the overall acidity levels some. You can also add a teaspoon of sugar as sugar balances out the acidity of tomatoes too.

Variations

  • Smoky - you can also add some canned chipotles in adobo sauce or some chipotle pepper powder (start with only ½ teaspoon and taste) to add a smoky, spicier flavor. If you don't have chipotle pepper powder, you can also use smoked paprika with a pinch of cayenne pepper to kick up the heat in a smoky way.
Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips

Equipment

A blender or food processor is needed for this blender salsa recipe.

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator up to 7 days.

Next Level Tips

  • If you have time, make this salsa the day before you need it which gives the flavors more time to blend and meld. Yes, you could theoretically make this blender salsa in 5 minutes. But if you're going for the best flavor, then give the salsa some time to develop a deeper flavor.
  • Don't be afraid of adding extra salt. Potato and tomato dishes need a lot more salt than home cooks expect. Have you ever tasted salsa and think it needs more of something but you're not quite sure what it needs? The answer, when it comes to salsa, is usually more salt. Salt enhances the other ingredients, cuts down on bitterness and balances acidity. And remember, we're making restaurant style salsa, and restaurants use a lot more salt than we typically do at home.
  • Don't over-blend the salsa. Over-blending ruins the texture and can also result in a bitter flavor.
  • If you're worried about raw onion flavor, you can soak the rough chopped onion for 10 minutes. Then drain and rinse. That mellows the flavor. You can also use a red onion as most people find red onions less intense than white onions.
  • Be careful handling jalapeños and habaneros. Cut jalapeños only to remove the stem and into a few large chunks for the blender. Only remove the stem on the habanero and add it directly to the blender. Wash your hands with dish soap immediately after handling hot peppers. The capsaicin that causes the heat can stay on your hands for hours. Your hands usually don't burn, but it can burn hours later taking out your contact lenses or going to the bathroom.
  • If you're looking for a salsa with fresh tomatoes, try my Pico de Gallo recipe. Pico de Gallo is the perfect salsa recipe to use fresh tomatoes.
Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa with a spoon sticking on a decorative plate full of corn tortilla chips. Blue corn tortilla chips and cut limes are in the background.

FAQ

Can I eat the salsa immediately?

You can, but salsa is best when given time for the flavors to combine and meld. I suggest waiting for at least an hour before eating. But the very best salsas are usually made the day before. If you're taste testing while you are making the salsa, I suggest only doing an initial taste for salt and/or heat. Those also need a little bit of time to develop, but you can get a rough idea if the salsa needs more salt or heat as you make it.

Can I use other types of tomatoes?

Yes, you can also use regular diced, canned tomatoes that are not fire roasted. If they are unsalted, then you may need to add more salt. If you want to use fresh tomatoes, I would recommend more of a Pico de Gallo recipe. However, you could use fresh tomatoes with this recipe. You would need to cut the tomatoes before adding them to the blender so that you could drain off the juices though.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Bowl with Pico de Gallo and cilantro in background
    Pico de Gallo
  • Close Up of Chipotle Almond Dip
    Chipotle Almond Dip
  • Taco seasoning spices separated on plate with measuring spoon
    Homemade Taco Seasoning
  • Fish Tacos on Plate with Cilantro in background
    Air Fryer Fish Tacos
Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa made with fire roasted tomatoes on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips

Restaurant Style Blender Salsa

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
For a quick and delicious salsa, try this Restaurant Style Blender Salsa. Just toss the ingredients in a blender, pulse a few times, and enjoy a smooth, slightly chunky salsa with a mild to medium spice level.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Chill time 1 hour hr
Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Servings 30

Equipment

  • 1 blender or food processor

Ingredients
  

  • 2 cans diced, fire roasted tomatoes (14.5 ounces each)
  • 1 medium onion rough chopped
  • 3 jalapeños rough chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic
  • 1 can mild green chilis (7 ounces)
  • 1 bunch cilantro medium size bunch
  • 3 tablespoons lime juice fresh squeezed
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 2 teaspoons salt

Instructions
 

  • Rough chop the onion and jalapeños.
  • Add the canned tomatoes to the blender followed by the onions, jalapeños, garlic and then the rest of the ingredients.
  • Pulse the blender several times to move around the larger chunks and cut down their size. After pulsing several times, blend on medium until the desired consistency is reached. This usually takes about 30 to 60 seconds depending on the blender. Do not over-blend as we want a slightly chunky texture.

Notes

To change the spice level of this blender salsa:
  • Mild - use only one jalapeño 
  • Mild to medium - make recipe as written 
  • Solid medium - add one more jalapeño 
  • Medium to hot - add one more jalapeño and one habanero pepper
  • Solid hot - add one more jalapeño and two habanero peppers

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword blender salsa, restaurant style salsa
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of bowl of restaurant style blender salsa on an orange plate with half regular tortilla chips and half blue corn tortilla chips

Spring Roll Salad

May 7, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 1 Comment

Spring Roll Salad is a fresh salad packed with leafy greens, chopped veggies, rice noodles and shrimp, and then it's topped with a tangy peanut dressing. It's a deconstructed spring roll, so it captures all the best flavors of a spring roll without the wrapper. This satisfying spring roll salad is light yet refreshing, the perfect entree for when you don't want a heavy meal.

Angled view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a small bowl of limes and another plate of Spring Roll Salad

Who doesn't love a good fresh spring roll? They usually contain shrimp, chopped veggies like cucumbers and carrots, rice noodles and herbs and...are sooooo delicious! I always eat too many, yet I still always want more. So let's get rid of the worst part of the spring roll, the wrapper, and add a lot more of the other ingredients. Think of a spring roll salad as a deconstructed fresh spring roll without the wrapper. And you still get the yummy spring roll sauce as a dressing too.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for spring roll salad

Ingredients needed for Spring Roll Salad: shrimp, rice stick noodles, carrots, cucumbers, cabbage, limes, cilantro and lettuce
  • Mixed leafy greens
  • Carrots
  • Cucumbers
  • Shrimp
  • Rice noodles
  • Cilantro
  • Limes
  • Optional veggies: red cabbage, avocado, bean spouts or green onions

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for peanut dressing

Ingredients needed for peanut dressing: peanut butter, hot water, tamari sauce, rice vinegar, honey, Gochujang and limes
  • Peanut butter
  • Hot water
  • Tamari sauce (or soy sauce)
  • Rice Vinegar
  • Lime juice
  • Honey or agave nectar

See recipe card for quantities.

Angled view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a small bowl of limes and another plate of Spring Roll Salad

Substitutions

  • Peanut butter - you can substitute almond butter for the peanut butter.
  • Rice vinegar - if you don't have rive vinegar, you can use white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or more lime juice. Rice vinegar is mild and slightly sweet with a lower acidity, so regular white vinegar is not a good substitute.
  • Herbs - if you're not a fan of cilantro (some people think it tastes like soap), you can substitute Thai basil or mint in this deconstructed spring roll salad as they are sometimes found in spring rolls as well.
  • Gochujang - if you don't have Gochujang (spicy Korean chili paste), you can substitute Sriracha.
  • Other veggies - spring rolls almost always contain carrots, cucumbers and leafy greens. They used to contain bean sprouts, but bean sprouts aren't as common anymore. You can change up the veggies to add red cabbage (I'm adding cabbage to everything these days), avocado, green onions or other veggies.

Variations

  • Vegan - substitute pan fried tofu for the shrimp or just omit the shrimp.
  • Gluten Free - make sure to use Tamari instead and not soy sauce and a gluten free brand of Gochuchang. Gochuchang is not always gluten free as some brands sneak in wheat products.
Close up photo of Spring Roll Salad: shrimp, rice stick noodles, carrots, cucumbers, cabbage, cilantro and lettuce topped with peanut dressing

Storage

Store any leftover spring roll salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator until the following day. Leafy greens with dressing do not last long. Any unused peanut dressing can be stored in the refrigerator in an airtight container for 5-7 days.

Next Level Tips

  • Gochujang is an amazing way to give dishes some spice, but different brands have different spice levels. They can range from spicy to super spicy, so always be cautious when trying a new brand. If you don't like spicy foods at all, you can omit the Gochujang.
  • This is a great salad to use as an entree salad. It includes a protein, fresh veggies, leafy greens and noodles in larger portions that makes this chopped spring roll salad quite filling. For an even heartier salad, you can add more shrimp.
  • I also recommend buying raw shrimp and cooking it at home. Most cold, cooked shrimp from the grocery store is flavorless and rubbery. Shrimp cooks very quickly and is often overcooked. Watch your shrimp carefully when cooking!
Overhead view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a fork and napkin, limes and another plate of Spring Roll Salad

FAQ

What is Gochujang?

Gochujang is a Korean red chili paste that has a unique, spicy yet slightly sweet flavor. It's usually made from red chilis, fermented soybean, glutinous rice, salt and other flavorings. However, check the label if you're gluten free as some brands use wheat products as well. Different brands have different spice levels. They can range from spicy to very spicy. Always be cautious when using a new brand.

Where can I buy Gochujang?

Gochujang is becoming more common. Now, you can buy it on Amazon, Whole Foods or even many local grocery stores. I was surprised to see it at my local grocery store in the section with other Asian foods. Walmart online even currently carries it.

Can I use another type of noodle?

Yes, spring rolls are typically made with rice stick noodles (also called rice vermicelli) but you can use another noodle of your choice.

Related

Looking for other recipes for dinner? Try these:

  • Overhead view of a partial plate of Thai Basil Chicken over a bed of white rice with Thai Basil in the background
    Thai Basil Chicken
  • Overhead view of plate of Thai beef salad over a bed of red leaf lettuce with another partial plate, cilantro stems, a napkin and a fork surrounding the plate
    Thai Beef Salad
  • Overhead view of pesto orzo pasta salad on a plate garnished with sliced basil and parmesan cheese
    Pesto Orzo Pasta Salad
  • Overhead photo of ground chicken stir fry with green beans and rice and a side of Gochujang on the side
    Spicy Ground Chicken Stir Fry with Green Beans
Overhead view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a fork and napkin, limes and another plate of Spring Roll Salad

Spring Roll Salad

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Spring Roll Salad is a fresh, light mix of leafy greens, veggies, rice noodles and shrimp that is topped wiith a tangy peanut dressing. It's all the delicious flavor and crunch of a spring roll, without the wrapper.
5 from 1 vote
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 35 minutes mins
Course Main Course, Salad, Side Dish
Cuisine Asian Fusion
Servings 2

Ingredients
  

Peanut Dressing

  • ½ cup creamy peanut butter
  • ¼ cup hot water
  • 2 tablespoons tamari sauce (or soy sauce)
  • 2 tablespoons rice vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice fresh squeezed
  • 1 tablespoon honey or agave nectar
  • ½ tablespoon Gochujang sauce* optional

Spring Roll Salad for Two

  • 4 ounces thin rice stick noodles cooked
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or sesame oil
  • ½ pound shrimp cooked
  • 4 cups mixed leafy greens
  • 2 medium carrots peels or matchsticks
  • 1 large cucumber large half slices
  • ½ cup cilantro
  • 1 lime quartered for garnish
  • 1 cup red cabbage optional
  • Other optional veggies: avocados bean sprouts, green onions

Instructions
 

Making the dressing

  • Add the peanut butter and hot water to a small bowl and whisk until fully combined. Or use a salad shaker and agitate until fully combined.
  • Add the remaining ingredients and whisk until fully combined.
  • Taste. Add more Gochujang for a spicier dressing.

Making the Salad for two

  • Chop the cilantro, limes, carrots, cucumbers and any optional veggies. Set aside.
  • Cook the rice noodles according to the package instructions. Usually, they are cooked by adding the rice noodles to boiling water, turning off the heat and letting them sit for 10 minutes until soft. Drain completely and set aside.
  • Cook the shrimp. Use paper towels to pat the thawed shrimp completely dry. Heat a skillet to medium high heat. Add a tablespoon of olive oil or sesame oil. Add shrimp in a single layer to the heated skillet. Cook 2 minutes on the first side. Flip and cook 1 to 3 minutes on the second side. Cook just until the shrimp turn opaque and pink. Remove the shrimp from the pan immediately and set aside. Squeeze a quarter of a lime over the shrimp.
  • Add two cups of the leafy greens to each salad plate. Top with the rice noodles, shrimp, veggies and herbs in sections over the leafy greens.
  • Drizzle the peanut dressing over the salads.

Notes

*Some Gochujang brands can be very spicy. Start with the listed amount for a mild to medium spice level. Then taste it and add more if you want. Or you can also put some Gochujang on the side for those who want to make their salad spicier. For a non-spicy version, omit it completely. 

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Spring Roll Salad
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of entree size plate of Spring Roll Salad drizzled with peanut dressing, next to a fork and a gray napkin, a bowl of limes, random limes and cilantro, a very small bowl of Gochujang and another plate of Spring Roll Salad

Old Fashioned Sour Cream Cookies

May 5, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 1 Comment

Old fashioned sour cream cookies are soft, drop sugar cookies with a nostalgic flavor that instantly takes you back to Grandma's kitchen. The sour cream makes them extra soft and also adds a little tang. They are topped with a smooth layer of frosting and sprinkles to match your theme which just adds to their cute charm.

Sour cream cookies with pink frosting and multicolored sprinkles on a cooling rack

Old fashioned sour cream cookies are my absolute favorite frosted sugar cookie. When it comes to cookies, I am firmly on Team Chewy, and these are nice and soft. The sour cream adds extra moisture and gives them a soft tender texture. Since they are drop cookies, they are easy to make too. There is no rolling, cutting or shaping involved. Just scoop them with a cookie scoop and drop them right onto the baking sheet. I love making these for special occasions and holidays because they are so easy to customize. They are perfect for Easter, Mother's Day, the Fourth of July, baby showers and Christmas. Really any occasion where you want a pop of color to match your theme. They are truly a very versatile sugar cookie.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for sour cream cookies

Ingredients needed to make old fashioned sour cream cookies: all purpose flour, white sugar, sour cream, vegetable shortening, an egg, baking soda, baking powder, almond or vanilla extract and salt.
  • All-purpose flour
  • White sugar
  • Sour cream
  • Shortening
  • Egg
  • Baking soda
  • Baking powder
  • Vanilla (or almond) extract
  • Salt

See recipe card for quantities.

Ingredients for frosting

Ingredients needed for frosting: milk, salted butter and powdered sugar. Other optional ingredients are food coloring, sprinkles and almond extract.
  • Milk
  • Salted butter
  • Powdered sugar
  • Almond extract
  • Sprinkles (optional)
  • Food coloring (optional)

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructions for baking the cookies

Overhead view of uncooked sour cream sugar cookies on a cookie sheet

Step 1: With a small cookie scoop (or a tablespoon), drop the cookies on a cookie sheet. About 20 cookies on a cookie sheet works great. They don't have to be perfect because they will be frosted. Then bake at 350 degrees for 11-13 minutes.

Overhead view of cooked sour cream sugar cookies on a cookie sheet

Step 2: The cookies are done when you can see that the bottoms have browned and the tops are just barely starting to brown.

Substitutions

  • Extract - you can use vanilla or almond extract or even another kind of extract in the sour cream cookies. My other sugar cookie recipe Colored Cookie Dough Sugar Cookies uses both almond and vanilla extract. Vanilla is absolutely amazing, but sometimes life gets a little too vanilla. Try something new! For the frosting, I recommend almond extract or clear vanilla if you're using food coloring.
Overhead photo of sour cream cookies with pink frosting and multicolored sprinkles on a serving plate

Variations

I like to vary the frosting and sprinkles to match my theme. I rarely ever use food coloring. But, these cookies and my Colored Cookie Dough Sugar Cookies are the exceptions. And, of course, you could still use a natural food coloring. But, if you are going to use artificial food coloring, I recommend using a gel food coloring. I used Wilton's icing color Pink for the pink frosted cookies in this post. The white frosted cookies need no coloring, just make sure to use almond extract or clear vanilla extract in the frosting. Regular vanilla will also work, but it can give the frosting a slight color tint.

Close up photo of sour cream cookies with white frosting and red, white and blue star sprinkles stacked up

For the green frosting color, I used Wilton's icing color in Leaf Green.

Close up photo of sour cream cookies with leaf green frosting and red and green sprinkles stacked up on a plate

Equipment

A stand or hand mixer is helpful for the sour cream cookies, and a small sauce pan is best for the frosting.

Storage

Store the cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 5-7 days. Or up to 10 days in the refrigerator.

Next Level Tips

  • Don't be afraid of the occasional use of vegetable shortening. It's vegan and it helps keep cookies moist and hold their shape. I definitely won't claim it's healthy. But, then again, most cookies aren't healthy anyway. These sour cream drop sugar cookies are great for special occasions when you need a colored treat that will match the theme of your event or holiday.
  • The frosting is a cooked frosting that hardens quickly, so I set up my frosting area by the stove in case I need to reheat the frosting. Cooked frosting might sound a little odd if you've never tried it, but it's so worth the extra effort. Regular buttercream frosting is too soft for cookies. But this cooked frosting hardens enough so that you can easily stack the cookies, yet it is still soft when you bite into it.
  • I set up a cooling rack inside of a baking sheet for frosting the cookies so that I can catch any wayward sprinkles.
  • This recipe can easily be doubled if you are having a large party or are making a lot of holiday cookies.
Overhead photo of sour cream cookies with pink frosting and multicolored sprinkles stacked up on a multi colored plate

FAQ

What makes these cookies old fashioned?

Sour cream cookies were very popular in the U.S. in the mid 20th century (okay, that alone makes them sound really old). And many grandmas from that era have a version of a sour cream cookie. Sour cream was (and is still) a great way to make moist cookies. Also, most of the time when you see shortening in a cookie recipe, it's almost always an old fashioned recipe.

Can I make the dough the day before?

Yes, you can make the dough the day before. This sour cream cookie dough is a very soft dough that doesn't get rock hard in the refrigerator. You can take the chilled dough out of the refrigerator and start working with it right away, even if it's been in the refrigerator overnight.

What type of sour cream should I use?

I recommend using full fat sour cream in baking. However, I have made these cookies with light sour cream, and they are still very good.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead photo of a peanut butter and jelly cheesecake decorated with peanut butter drizzle and some Nutter Butter cookies
    Peanut Butter and Jelly Cheesecake
  • Overhead photo of raspberry white chocolate cupcakes where one is centered and surrounded by others in partial view
    Raspberry White Chocolate Cupcakes
  • Close up view focused on one vanilla bean cupcake with vanilla bean buttercream with sprinkles surrounded by other cupcakes in partial view
    Vanilla Bean Cupcakes with Vanilla Bean Buttercream
  • Angled overhead photo of a carrot cake bundt cake topped with toasted coconut
    Carrot Bundt Cake
Overhead photo of sour cream cookies with pink frosting and multicolored sprinkles stacked up on a multi colored plate

Old Fashioned Sour Cream Cookies

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
Old fashioned sour cream cookies are soft, chewy drop cookies with a hint of tang and a smooth layer of frosting. They're easy to make and perfect for any occasion, from holidays to casual gatherings.
5 from 1 vote
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 22 minutes mins
Chill and frosting time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time 3 hours hrs 7 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 40 small cookies

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer

Ingredients
  

Cookie ingredients

  • 2 cups all-purpose flour
  • ½ teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • ⅛ teaspoon salt
  • ½ cup vegetable shortening
  • ¾ cup white sugar
  • 1 teaspoon almond (or vanilla) extract
  • 1 egg
  • ½ cup sour cream

Frosting Ingredients

  • ¼ cup milk
  • 1 tablespoon salted butter
  • 1 teaspoon almond (or vanilla) extract
  • 3 cups powdered sugar
  • food coloring optional

Instructions
 

Making the cookies

  • Add the all-purpose flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt to a small bowl. Stir well and set aside.
  • Add the shortening to a mixing bowl and mix on medium until no lumps remain.
  • Slowly add the white sugar to the mixing bowl and mix on medium until the shortening and sugar are creamed.
  • Add the extract and the egg to the mixing bowl and mix on medium until the egg is incorporated.
  • Alternate adding the flour mixture and the sour cream to the mixing bowl and mix on medium until fully incorporated.
  • Chill for a minimum of two hours up to overnight. The dough is very soft and sticky. Chilling also makes the dough easier to work with.
  • Preheat oven to 350℉. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or a baking mat.
  • Use the smallest, one tablespoon cookie scoop and drop the dough on to the lined baking sheet. 20 cookies evenly spaced per baking sheet is perfect. A cookie scoop is great for making uniform sized cookies, but you can also drop one tablespoon of dough from the tablespoon itself as well.
  • Bake for 11-13 minutes. Check at 11 minutes. The bottoms will be golden brown but the tops will be just staring to lightly brown.
  • Allow the cookies to fully cool before frosting.

Making the frosting

  • Melt the milk and salted butter in a small saucepan over medium low heat. Once the butter has melted, add in any extract and food coloring and stir. Stir until the food coloring has completely dissolved and incorporated.
  • Turn the heat to low. Add the powdered sugar about one cup at a time and stir until melted. [The frosting can be made thicker by adding more powdered sugar. Add only ¼ cup more powdered sugar at a time and then stir. The frosting thickens quickly. If you made it too thick and want a thinner frosting, you can add more milk but only add one tablespoon of additional milk at a time.]
  • Once the frosting has melted and is spreadable, turn the heat off. You can remove the pan from the stove, but leave the frosting in the saucepan.
  • Add the frosting to cookies with an icing spatula, regular spatula, knife or spoon. As you go, you'll want to stir the frosting in the saucepan frequently to keep it from hardening. If the frosting in the saucepan hardens too much, place it back on the stove on low until the frosting is spreadable again.
  • The frosting hardens on the cookies very quickly. If using sprinkles, it's best to add the sprinkles to each cookie as each cookie is frosted.
  • Once the frosting has fully hardened, the cookies may be served immediately or stacked and placed in an airtight container.

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword Old Fashioned Sour Cream Sugar Cookies, Sour Cream Sugar Cookies
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Sour cream cookies with pink frosting and multicolored sprinkles stacked up on a serving plate

No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake

April 29, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake is the perfect light and refreshing dessert. With a creamy, fluffy strawberry cheesecake filling, a crunchy strawberry crust and topping for texture, and a vibrant garnish of fresh strawberries, it's a delicious and irresistible dessert. It's prefect for berry season and warm summer days when you don't want to turn on the oven.

Photo of a partial no bake strawberry crunch cheesecake that has been cut. Cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries. Inside of cheesecake visible.

Strawberries are the ultimate flavor of summer. Aside from watermelon, they're my favorite summer fruit. And while watermelon cheesecake might be pushing it, no bake strawberry cheesecake is the perfect summer dessert. It has that signature light and fluffy texture you expect from a no bake cheesecake and then it's paired with the sweet flavor of fresh strawberries. A strawberry crunch creates both the crust and the crumble topping, and sliced strawberries finishes it off beautifully.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Ingredients needed to make no bake strawberry crunch cheesecake: cream cheese, heavy whipping cream, powdered sugar, freeze dried strawberry powder, strawberries, Golden Oreos and salted butter
  • Strawberries
  • Freeze dried strawberry powder (unsweetened)
  • Cream cheese
  • Heavy whipping cream
  • Powdered sugar
  • Golden Oreos
  • Salted butter

See recipe card for quantities.

Instructional tips

Overhead photo of strawberry crunch crust in a springform pan

Strawberry crunch crust tip: since we're not baking the crust, make sure to press the crust very firmly into the springform pan.

Overhead photo of a bowl of mashed strawberries

Mashed strawberries tip - don't process or mash the strawberries into juice. Leave some texture in the strawberries.

Overhead photo of no bake strawberry cheesecake in a springform pan before it has been decorated

Cheesecake filling tip - add the cheesecake filling on top of the crust and use a spatula to even out the filling. We'll be adding strawberry crunch topping, so it doesn't have to be perfect.

Overhead view of an entire no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries

Finishing the cheesecake tip - wait until after the cheesecake is done chilling to top with the strawberry crunch. Finally, finish it off with some beautifully cut fresh strawberries.

Substitutions

  • Freeze dried strawberry powder - if you don't have freeze dried strawberry powder, you can make your own by grinding up freeze dried strawberries (like from Trader Joe's). You can also substitute strawberry gelatin in a pinch, though I would not recommend this. Strawberry gelatin can have a processed, chemically flavor. The ingredient list for gelatin can be pretty gross too.
  • Golden Oreos - you can substitute other plain or vanilla sandwich cookies for the Golden Oreos if they have a similar fat content.

Variations

  • Other berries - strawberries are the most common berries used to make cheesecakes. However, you can easily substitute raspberries or blackberries or use a combination of berries to create a mixed berry version.
Overhead view of half of a no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries

Equipment

Making this strawberry crunch cheesecake is easier if you have a stand mixer and a food processor, but a hand mixer and a hand masher will work just fine.

Storage

Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. After that, the fresh cut strawberries can become mushy and the strawberry crunch on top will start to absorb some of the moisture from the cheesecake and become less crunchy over time.

Next Level Tips

  • Definitely use freeze dried strawberry powder or grind your own powder from freeze dried strawberries. It's more natural and better tasting than the strawberry gelatin that's in a lot of strawberry cheesecake recipes.
  • No bake cheesecakes don't have any eggs, so you can taste the filling and add more strawberry powder to the cheesecake cake filling if you want. You might be tempted to add more mashed strawberries, but remember that real strawberries are mostly water so we don't want to add too much water to the cheesecake filling.
  • I also par-bake a lot of my no bake cheesecake crusts. You can bake the crust at 325 for 6 minutes to get a crisp crust. Otherwise, just make sure to firmly press down the crust when adding the strawberry crunch to the springform pan. That way, it will stay together when slicing and serving.
  • You can also experiment with other decorations for the topping. Here is an article from Shari's Berries on how to make strawberry roses . I have yet to master strawberry roses, but they do look super fun!
Overhead view of an entire no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries

FAQ

Can I use strawberry gelatin instead of freeze dried strawberry powder?

Yes, but gelatin can have an unnatural, chemical strawberry flavor on top of a questionable ingredient list. It's best if you can use a freeze dried strawberry powder or grind your own powder from freeze dried strawberries.

Can I whip the heavy whipping cream and then fold it in?

Yes, of course. I find that by method more time consuming and more stressful. By starting with room temperature cream cheese, we can add the powdered sugar and heavy cream at the end and mix it on medium high to high to get the same light fluffy texture. Less steps and less stress = baking win!

Can I add pink food coloring to make the filing more pink?

Yes, but it's not necessary for this dessert. The filling has a pink tint, the strawberry crunch has a pink tint, and if you put strawberries on top, it's very clear what the flavor of the dessert will be. If you still want to use added food coloring in the cheesecake filling, I recommend adding it with the cream cheese when you are mixing it to eliminate any lumps. That's the best time to make sure any food coloring gets evenly distributed.

Overhead view of a no bake strawberry cheesecake that has been cut. The cheesecake is topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries. There are several full and cut strawberries on the table surrounding the cheesecake.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Overhead photo of 25 chocolate peanut butter truffles on a square, white plate. Some are decorated with crushed peanuts.
    Chocolate Peanut Butter Truffles
  • Partial view of an orange chocolate cheesecake garnished with orange chocolate ganache and orange slices
    Orange Chocolate Cheesecake
  • Overhead photo of white chocolate cranberry cookies with an orange drizzle on a wire cooling rack
    White Chocolate Cranberry Orange Cookies
  • Close up photo of gingerbread crinkle cookies cooling on a baking sheet
    Gingerbread Crinkle Cookies
Overhead view of an entire no-bake strawberry cheesecake topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries

No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake

Tracy @ Next Level Baker
No Bake Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake is a light and fluffy cheesecake filling layered in between strawberry crunch and topped with fresh berries. It's an easy, oven-free dessert that's perfect for berry season and warm summer days.
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 35 minutes mins
Minimum chill time 6 hours hrs
Total Time 6 hours hrs 35 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 12

Equipment

  • 1 Stand or hand mixer
  • 1 Food processor or hand masher

Ingredients
  

Strawberry crunch crust and topping

  • 24 Golden Oreos
  • 2 tablespoons freeze dried strawberry powder unsweetened
  • 3 tablespoons salted butter melted

Strawberry cheesecake filling

  • 24 ounces cream cheese room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons freeze dried strawberry powder unsweetened
  • ½ cup strawberries mashed
  • 1 cup heavy whipping cream
  • ¾ cup powdered sugar

Decorating the cheesecake

  • 1 cup reserved strawberry crunch from the crust step
  • 1 tablespoon salted butter melted
  • fresh cut strawberries for decoration no added sugar

Instructions
 

  • Spray a 8 or 9 inch springform pan with cooking spray.

Making the strawberry crunch crust and topping

  • Add 24 Golden Oreos (insides included) into a food processor and grind into smaller pieces. When almost finished, add in 2 tablespoons of freeze dried strawberry powder and blend until the powder is evenly distributed and the large chunks of Oreos are gone.
  • Remove one cup of the Oreo and strawberry crunch mixture and reserve for the topping. Place in an airtight container.
  • Microwave 3 tablespoons of salted butter just until melted, 15-30 seconds. Mix the butter into the remaining Oreo mixture.
  • Add the crust mixture to the springform pan. Even it out and then press very firmly into the pan with a flat bottom of a measuring cup.

Making the strawberry filling

  • Add enough berries to a food processor to create ½ cup of mashed berries. Start with 5-6 berries. The number needed will vary with the size of the strawberries. Blend them until the berries are mashed but not a liquid. Set aside.
  • Add the room temperature cream cheese to the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until the cream cheese is light and fluffy with no lumps remaining. Approximately 2-3 minutes.
  • Add 2 tablespoons of freeze dried powder and the mashed strawberries to the mixing bowl, and mix on low until blended. Approximately one minute.
  • Add the powdered sugar and heavy whipping cream to the mixing bowl and mix on medium high to high until light and fluffy. Approximately 2-3 minutes.
  • Pour the cheesecake filling on top of the crust and even out the top with a spatula.
  • Refrigerate for a minimum of 6 hours but preferably overnight.

Topping the cheesecake

  • Run a knife around the outside of the springform pan and then remove the ring.
  • Melt one tablespoon of butter in the microwave, approximately 10-15 seconds. Mix the melted butter in with the one cup of the reserved strawberry crunch until the butter has been evenly distributed and the mixture resembles a crumble.
  • Sprinkle the strawberry crunch over the entire cheesecake.
  • Slice strawberries and place the strawberries slices around the outer edge of the cheesecake rim.
  • If using a cardboard cake board or a serving plate, remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan with a cake lifter by gently sliding the cheesecake from the springform pan bottom on to the cake board or serving plate while supporting the underside of the cheesecake. [This can also be done before decorating, but I find it less messy overall to move the cheesecake after decorating.] Serve or refrigerate!

Would you like to save this?

We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

Don't worry! We won't spam you!

Keyword No bake strawberry cheesecake, No bake strawberry crunch cheesecake
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
Overhead view of a partial view of a no bake strawberry cheesecake on a cake board that has been cut. The cheesecake is topped with strawberry crunch and cut strawberries. One slice of cheesecake is on a plate next to the cut cheesecake.

Aldi Charcuterie Board

April 17, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

Aldi makes shopping for cheeses, meats, fruits and fancy snacks for a charcuterie board cheap and easy. The best of both worlds! Aldi has a great selection of very budget friendly choices that look great and taste fantastic. And we'll show you how to create an Aldi Charcuterie Board for under $30 too. No, this post is not sponsored by Aldi. I just love the store.

Overhead photo of a plate with nuts and pita chips next to a charcuterie board made with ingredients from Aldi and some small decorative skewers

Charcuterie boards are fun and fancy, which is a great combination. A lot of things are fun but not fancy or fancy but not fun. Yet, charcuterie boards are both! I used to find building them stressful and expensive though. But after I learned a few tips on how to build them and create them cheaply, it's now super easy. For this charcuterie board, we bought everything at Aldi and the goal was to stay under $30, which we did. Aldi seems to be opening a lot of new stores near us, so they are very convenient. But if you don't have an Aldi near you, look for a Trader Joe's. Then check out my how to build a cheap charcuterie board post where we bought all the ingredients at Trader Joe's.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Aldi Charcuterie Board Shopping List

Close up photo of a Charcuterie Board made from ingredients bought at Aldi: strawberries, blackberries, blueberries, cheese cubes, pita chips, nuts, meat sticks and cured meats

Here is what we bought (see receipt below):

  • One pack of cheese cubes ($2.99)
  • One package of pita crackers ($2.49)
  • Two beef sticks ($1.45 each)
  • Two packages of salami ($3.49 each)
  • One package of everything bagel cashews ($4.29)
  • Strawberries ($1.79), Blueberries ($3.59) and Blackberries ($2.39)
Photo of receipt for items purchased for Aldi Charcuterie Board for under $30

Cost

The cost of a charcuterie board can get expensive if you're shopping at a regular grocery store. However, making a charcuterie board shopping list and shopping at a low cost store like Aldi will help bring down the cost. Our budget was $30, and our total came in under budget at $27.42. See the receipt photo above. It's totally reasonable and actually easy to make a cheap charcuterie board that looks and tastes fabulous.

Overhead photo of a Charcuterie Board made from ingredients from Aldi: strawberries, blackberries, blueberries, cheese cubes, pita chips, nuts, meat sticks and cured meats

Instructions for making the charcuterie board

    If you want step by step instructions with photos on how to build another cheap charcuterie spread from Trader Joe's, check out my how to make a cheap charcuterie board post with step by step photos and instructions.

    What is a charcuterie box?

    A charcuterie box is a more portable charcuterie spread that is typically packaged in a bakery box or in a pan with a lip. The pan we used for this charcuterie spread was 10.5 inches by 12.5 inches with a 1.5 inches high lip. So why did we put our charcuterie spread in a pan? Because we were taking it to a get together, and it's so much easier to transport! If you're serving your charcuterie spread at home, using a board is easy. But transporting the board isn't always easy. So using a pan or a bakery box where the ingredients don't shift while traveling is key. Using a ceramic pan or a box lined with parchment paper helps prevent any staining of your charcuterie board too. Here are some common options for a charcuterie box:

    • A baking or serving pan with a lip
    • A quarter-sheet or half-sheet baking sheet
    • A bakery box lined with parchment paper

    You can buy bakery boxes at places like Hobby Lobby or Amazon. A 10x10 inch box is perfect for a smaller square spread and a 10x14 inch box is perfect for a more typical sized charcuterie spread. Some bakery boxes have cute little windows too.

    Close up photo of a Charcuterie Board made from ingredients bought at Aldi: strawberries, blackberries, blueberries, cheese cubes, pita chips, nuts, meat sticks and cured meats

    Substitutions

    • Gluten free - make sure to choose gluten free crackers.
    • Vegan - skip the meats (or use meat substitutes) and use vegan cheeses.

    Storage

    To store leftover charcuterie board ingredients, separate them into different air tight containers. Meats, cheeses and fruits go in the refrigerator. Crackers can be stored at room temperature.

    Next Level Tips

    • We built this Aldi charcuterie board with only ingredients we purchased at Aldi with a budget of $30. But, you can always fill in your board with ingredients you already have at home. I usually have other nuts, olives, carrots, hummus and little jam and honey jars at home. Sometimes, I'll use baguette slices, mustards, chocolates and other candies if I have those too. The options are limitless, and it will save even more money if you use some ingredients that you already have on hand.
    • Fruits for charcuterie boards can be one of the most expensive parts. Choosing fruits that are in season will help reduce the costs. When we were in the produce section, we noticed that strawberries were on sale so we knew our board would have strawberries!
    • Putting your charcuterie spread in a box or a pan with a lip is perfect for traveling. But using a pan with a lip is a great idea to use at home too. The lip allows you to pile more ingredients on (so you have to refill it less) and it prevents any ingredients from tumbling off too.
    Side view of a portion of a charcuterie board made with ingredients from Aldi next to some plates and some small decorative skewers

    Related

    Looking for other recipes for brunch? Try these:

    • Overhead view of randomly placed prosciutto wrapped dates on a white serving platter, some topped with balsamic glaze and some topped with hot honey and chopped pistachios
      Prosciutto Wrapped Dates
    • Close up overhead view of squash toast cut in four pieces
      Butternut Squash Toast
    • Close up photo of fresh homemade dinner rolls in a sheet pan
      Overnight Dinner Rolls (Dairy Free)
    • Cranberry and Pecan encrusted cheese ball surrounded by 4 different types of crackers
      Cranberry Pecan Cheese Ball
    Overhead photo of a part of Charcuterie Board made from ingredients from Aldi: strawberries, blackberries, blueberries, cheese cubes, pita chips, nuts, meat sticks and cured meats

    Aldi Charcuterie Board

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    Using ingredients from Aldi makes building a charcuterie board simple and affordable-good cheeses, solid meats, fresh fruits, and fun crackers and nuts that look great without spending a ton.
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    0 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American

    Ingredients
      

    • 1-2 different types of cheeses
    • 1-2 different types of cured meats
    • 1-2 different types of crackers
    • 1 or more different fruits
    • 1 or more different types of nuts

    Instructions
     

    • Chop any ingredients that need to be chopped.
    • When you are building the board, start by adding enough ingredients to cover the bottom of the board. (Then go back in and layer more once you have added some of all of the ingredients and are happy with your basic design.)
    • Place any ingredients that are watery, like cut strawberries or olives, in little bowls. You can also use little bowls for decorative purposes.
    • If you are building a box, it's easier to start at the edges and work your way in. Start by placing some fruit and folded or rolled cured meats in opposite corners.
    • Add some cheese(s) near the meats and some crackers near the cheese(s).
    • Add in any other types of fruit near the existing fruit.
    • Fill in any holes with nuts or more meats.
    • Once the bottom of the board/box/pan is completely covered, layer in more ingredients to give the board more bulk. If you don't want to refill the board, make sure the board is as full as possible before serving.
    • Serve or refrigerate.

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Charcuterie Board
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Overhead photo of a Charcuterie Board made from ingredients from Aldi

    Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls

    April 11, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

    Biscoff cinnamon rolls are soft, sweet swirls of dough filled with rich cinnamon and Speculoos cookie butter and then topped with a creamy cookie butter frosting, a warm drizzle of melted cookie butter and a sprinkle of crushed Biscoff cookies. The Speculoos adds a deep, caramelized sugar flavor that takes these cinnamon rolls to the next level. They are comforting, indulgent and absolutely irresistible.

    Overhead view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls with one missing

    Have you seen all my other cinnamon roll recipes? It's no secret that I love cinnamon rolls. There's just something magical about soft, fluffy dough swirled with sweet cinnamon. It's one of my all-time favorite flavor combos! These Biscoff cinnamon rolls start with my basic cinnamon roll recipe, and then we add cookie butter to the filling and frosting and then top the rolls with a cookie butter drizzle and crushed Biscoff cookies. I'm not going to lie-they're definitely sweet. They are also rich, indulgent and absolutely perfect for special occasions. You know, those occasions that you want to treat yourself, your family and your friends.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients for Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls

    Ingredients needed for Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls: all-purpose flour, whole milk, eggs, active dry yeast, white sugar, salted butter, cookie butter, brown sugar, salt and cinnamon.
    • All-purpose flour
    • Whole milk
    • Eggs
    • Salted butter
    • White sugar
    • Active dry yeast
    • Salt
    • Cinnamon
    • Brown sugar
    • Cookie butter

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Ingredients for Biscoff Frosting and Toppings

    Ingredients needed for Biscoff frosting, drizzle and toppings: powdered sugar, salted butter, cookie butter, heavy whipping cream and Biscoff cookies.
    • Cookie butter
    • Powdered sugar
    • Salted butter
    • Heavy shipping cream
    • Biscoff or cinnamon cookies

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Substitutions

    • Biscoff cookie butter - you don't have to use Biscoff brand cookie butter, you can use Trader Joe's Speculoos cookie butter if that's more convenient for you.
    • Biscoff cookies - you can substitute other cinnamon cookies for the crumble on top or you can skip those cookies altogether, but they do add a fun crunch to the top of the Biscoff cinnamon rolls.
    • Vegan - Biscoff cookie butter and Biscoff cookies are both vegan. You can make a vegan version of these cinnamon rolls by using a neutral plant-based milk like oat milk, your favorite plant-based butter, your favorite plant-based heavy cream (or just a smaller amount of plant-based milk) for the heavy cream, and flax eggs* or Bob Mill's egg replacer for the eggs. *To make 3 flax eggs, mix 3 tablespoon of flaxseed meal and 9 tablespoons of water and let it sit for 10 minutes

    Equipment

    A hand mixer or stand mixer is needed for these cinnamon rolls.

    Overhead photo of Biscoff cinnamon roll on a plate with a bite taken out in front of a partial view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls with a few Biscoff cookies scattered around

    Storage

    Store the Biscoff cinnamon rolls in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 days or in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To warm up cinnamon rolls with Biscoff on day 2 or later, put them on a plate and microwave them for 15-25 seconds. The frosting melts quickly, so start with 15 seconds and check them.

    Next Level Tips

    • You can also make these the night before just like my overnight cinnamon rolls. If I know I'll be rushed for time on the morning I need the rolls, I will start the cinnamon rolls the day before. The overnight cinnamon rolls recipe contains all the instructions for starting the sweet rolls the night before.
    • Weigh your flour. I definitely recommend buying a kitchen scale if you don't already have one. Kitchen scales are fairly cheap now. The measurements are more accurate with weight, and you'll find it's quicker too. Different brands of flour have different weights, and not everyone measures flour the same. If you don't have a kitchen scale, the next best way to measure flour is the fluff and scoop method. Fluff the flour in its container and then lightly scoop the flour into the measuring cup with a spoon. Lightly level the measuring cup with a knife. I use Kirkland's organic all-purpose flour from Costco, and I always weigh flour even if I don't weigh any other of the ingredients.
    Side view of one Biscoff cinnamon roll on a plate in front of a pan of cinnamon rolls

    FAQ

    How do I cut the cinnamon roll log into individual rolls?

    There are three popular methods for cutting the log into cinnamon rolls: the serrated (or very sharp knife) method, the dental floss method and the pizza cutter method.
     
    The serrated knife or very sharp knife method. Use a serrated knife or a very sharp knife to cut the log into rolls. 

    The dental floss method. Break off a long string of (non-flavored!) dental floss and slide the floss underneath the log roll where you want to make a cut. Make sure the log is in the center of the string of floss and bring the two sides of floss together to meet each other. Then put the floss pieces into the opposite hands, cross the floss over each other across the top of the roll and pull each side until it cuts through the log. Repeat for each roll. 

    The pizza cutter method. Use a pizza cutter and make 9-12 individual cuts. Roll each strip up separately. This method can be messy, so you'll need to make an extra effort to roll the rolls tightly.

    How much cookie butter do I need altogether?

    You can buy one small 14 ounce jar of cookie butter to use for this entire recipe. You'll use most of it, but you won't need the whole jar.

    Related

    Looking for other brunch recipes? Try these:

    • Close up, side view of one slice of gluten free banana cake on a plate with the rest of the cake in the background
      Gluten Free Banana Cake with Chocolate Frosting
    • Top view of a decorated salted caramel pecan cheesecake
      Salted Caramel Pecan Cheesecake
    • Side photo of a cut loaf of pumpkin bread with streusel topping so that you can see the inside with a slice of pumpkin bread on the side
      Pumpkin Bread with Streusel Topping
    • Overhead view of a finished fall dessert charcuterie board on a round, wooden board surrounded by small, mini pumpkins
      Fall Dessert Charcuterie Board
    Overhead photo of Biscoff cinnamon roll on a plate with a bite taken out in front of a partial view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls

    Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    Biscoff cinnamon rolls are soft, sweet swirls filled with Speculoos cookie butter and topped with creamy frosting, melted cookie butter drizzle and crushed Biscoff cookies. The Speculoos cookie butter adds a rich, caramelized layer of flavor that makes these cinnamon rolls delicious, indulgent and irresistible.
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 28 minutes mins
    Rise Time and Frosting 3 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 13 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12

    Equipment

    • 1 Hand or stand mixer

    Ingredients
      

    Dough

    • ¾ cup whole milk warmed
    • 2 ¼ teaspoons active dry yeast
    • ¼ cup white sugar
    • 4 ½ cups all-purpose flour (540 grams)
    • 1 tsp salt
    • 10 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
    • 3 eggs room temperature

    Filling

    • ¼ cup Biscoff cookie butter
    • ½ cup brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon cinnamon

    Cookie Butter Frosting

    • 8 tablespoons salted butter softened
    • ¼ cup Biscoff cookie butter
    • 3 cups powdered sugar
    • 3 tablespoons heavy cream

    Toppings

    • ¼ cup Biscoff cookie butter melted
    • 4 Biscoff cookies (crushed) optional

    Instructions
     

    Make the Dough

    • Bring the butter and eggs to room temperature.
    • Heat the milk in the microwave until warmed to 105℉ - 110℉. [It's best to use a kitchen thermometer if you have one.] Add the warm milk, yeast and a little of the white sugar to the mixing bowl. Let sit for 5-10 minutes.
    • Add the all-purpose flour and salt to a small bowl and set aside.
    • Add the rest of the white sugar, the softened butter and the eggs to the mixing bowl. Mix on low speed until the eggs are incorporated. The butter will not incorporate at this stage, which is normal.
    • Add the flour and salt mixture to the mixing bowl in three to four different stages. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl after each addition and then mix on a low speed until the flour has been incorporated. Repeat until all flour has been added.
    • After the flour has been incorporated, switch to the dough hook and knead on low speed for 5 minutes. If you don't have a dough hook, you can knead by hand.
    • Spray a large bowl (or reuse the mixing bowl) with cooking spray. The dough is sticky and that's normal. Let the dough rise in a covered bowl for a total of two hours. After one hour, knead the dough using the stretch and fold method. If you're familiar with this method, do it in the bowl. If this is your first time, take the dough out of the bowl and set on a floured surface. Take a hold of a large piece of dough at the 12 position, stretch it away from your body, and then fold it back toward the middle of the dough ball. Rotate the ball ⅛ to ¼ of a turn and repeat the stretch out and fold back motions. Keep repeating until you have gone around 2 times and the dough becomes less stretchy. You DO NOT have to do this, BUT it does make the rolls more fluffy and soft. Put the dough back in the bowl to rise for another hour. So, the total rise time is two hours with the optional stretch and fold after one hour.

    Make the Filling

    • Spray a 9x13 pan (or a large round pan) with cooking spray and set aside.
    • After the dough has risen for the two hours, put it on a floured surface and roll it out into a 12 x 18 inch rectangle. [If the dough is ever resistant, let it rest for 10 minutes. Don't overwork the dough trying to roll it out. It should roll out easily.]
    • Soften ¼ cup of cookie butter in the microwave for 15 seconds. Brush the cookie butter onto the dough with a pastry/silicone brush or a spatula. The cookie butter is the glue that will hold the brown sugar and cinnamon to the dough.
    • Mix the brown sugar and cinnamon together in a small bowl until the cinnamon is incorporated into the brown sugar.
    • Sprinkle the brown sugar and cinnamon mixture evenly over the dough and lightly press it in.
    • Starting with the long side, roll the dough into a tight log.
    • Cut the dough into 9-12 pieces. I use 9 pieces for a large round pan or 12 pieces for a 9x13 pan. Use your favorite cutting method. If you aren't sure how to cut the roll, see my FAQ section for different cutting methods.
    • Add the cut cinnamon rolls into your sprayed pan of choice, cover with aluminum foil or plastic wrap and let rise for 30-60 minutes depending on the temperature. On warmer days, the dough will rise quicker. [For overnight rolls, cover and place directly in to the refrigerator before rising. Remove the next day and let sit on the counter for one hour to get to room temperature prior to baking.]

    Baking the Cinnamon Rolls

    • Preheat oven to 350 ℉.
    • Bake the cinnamon rolls uncovered for 27-32 minutes. Check them at 27 minutes. [If you made overnight rolls, they could take longer if they were colder to start with.] They will be lightly golden brown on top.
    • When you remove the cinnamon rolls from the oven, start making the frosting.

    Making the Frosting

    • Put the softened butter and cookie butter in to a mixing bowl and mix on medium until thoroughly combined and fluffy.
    • Add the powdered sugar and heavy whipping cream to the mixing bowl and mix on medium to medium high until light and fluffy. It takes about 3-4 minutes.
    • Once the cinnamon rolls have cooled for at least 20 minutes, spread the frosting on the rolls. If you are not serving them warm, wait until the rolls have completely cooled to frost them.

    Drizzle and Cookie Crumbles

    • Warm ¼ cup of cookie butter in the microwave for 15-30 seconds until the cookie butter is pourable but still holds its shape. Use a spoon, piping bag or a decorator bottle to drizzle the cookie butter across the tops of the cinnamon rolls in any pattern.
    • Crush a few Biscoff cookies and sprinkle them over the cinnamon rolls. This is optional but it adds a fun and delicious crunch to the cinnamon rolls.

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Biscoff Cinnamon Rolls
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Overhead view of a pan of Biscoff cinnamon rolls with one missing

    Single Layer Carrot Cake (No Nuts)

    April 4, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

    Single layer carrot cake is moist and flavorful, with a nice balance of spices and grated carrots. It's topped with a smooth cream cheese frosting that adds a sweet and creamy touch. Carrot cake is an indulgent, satisfying dessert that's perfect for Easter or any special occasion. Best of all, no nuts!

    Overhead view of carrot cake in a 9x13 baking pan with a few pieces missing

    I'm not sure how or when carrot cake became associated with Easter. I was about to research it when I decided...it doesn't matter. I'm just thankful that someone, somewhere decided to put carrots in a cake. And I'm thankful we eat it at Easter and anytime anyone else requests it!

    Also, I'll be honest, I don't eat carrot cake because it's healthy. It just isn't, no matter how many carrots we use. This single layer carrot cake recipe is the same basic 9x13 carrot cake recipe that my mom has made my entire life. I've developed healthier versions of a lot of her other recipes over the years, but not this one. Carrot cake is just one of those desserts that was meant to be enjoyed because it is moist, it is sweet and it is indulgent. Could we cut down on the oil or the sugar? Sure, absolutely. And we can also just enjoy carrot cake for what it was meant to be...over the top and indulgently delicious.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients for Carrot Cake

    Ingredients needed for carrot cake: shredded carrots, all-purpose flour, white sugar, eggs, olive oil, cinnamon, baking soda and salt
    • Shredded carrots
    • All-purpose flour
    • White sugar
    • Vegetable oil
    • Eggs
    • Cinnamon
    • Baking soda
    • Salt

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Ingredients for Cream Cheese Frosting

    Ingredients needed for cream cheese frosting: salted butter, cream cheese, powdered sugar and salt
    • Cream cheese
    • Salted butter
    • Powdered sugar
    • Vanilla
    • Salt

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Variations

    • Vegan - this carrot cake can easily be made vegan with an egg substitute. I've used flax eggs as an egg substitute with this recipe. To make 4 flax eggs, use 4 tablespoons of ground flaxseed and 12 tablespoons of water. Mix well and then let sit for 5-10 minutes.
    • Add-ins - while this recipe is for more of a pure carrot cake, you can add nuts, drained pineapple or raisins to the carrot cake if you want. Or you can top the frosting with toasted coconut. If you've never toasted coconut, I describe the process in my Samoas cupcake recipe.
    Overhead photo of slice of carrot cake on a plate in front of a baking pan of carrot cake with three pieces missing

    Equipment

    A grater or a food processor is needed for this recipe.

    Storage

    Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Next Level Tips

    • Grate your carrots! I know it takes a little longer than dumping the carrots in a food processor, but freshly grated carrots provide a better and moister texture to the cake.
    • If you want to add fancy frosting decorations like in the photos, I used a Wilton 1M tip for the rosettes and stars. The Wilton 1M is my favorite all-around tip. To pipe a rosette flower, think of it as the opposite of traditional cupcake frosting. For traditional cupcake frosting, you would start at the outside of the cupcake circle and spiral inward and upward. To pipe a rosette flower, start at the inside of an imaginary circle and spiral outward but not upward. It's just a flat flower. Then, when you're done with the rosettes, go back and add little stars, with the same 1M tip, to cover any open cake space that didn't get originally covered with rosettes. Or you can overlap the rosettes, but I like the combination of rosettes and stars on single layer cakes.
    Overhead photo of carrot cake with cream cheese frosting piped on in rosettes

    FAQ

    Do I have to do the fancy frosting?

    No, absolutely not. I've just piped so many cakes and cupcakes in my life, that it's faster for me. If you look closely at the picture, the frosting isn't perfect. But guess what? It only took 5 minutes, and it would take me a lot longer to frost a cake neatly with a knife. As long as you have the frosting, no one cares what it looks like, so get it on however you would like.

    Close up side view of carrot cake

    Related

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    • Overhead close up photo of cherry chocolate chunk cookies on a cooling rack
      Cherry Chocolate Chunk Cookies
    • Overhead image of a pumpkin pecan cheesecake where a slice has been cut and it's just starting to be removed with a cake knife
      Pumpkin Pecan Cheesecake
    • Overhead view of slices of gluten free pumpkin bar cake with cream cheese frosting. The middle slice is turned on its side so that you can see the density and crumb of the cake.
      Gluten Free Pumpkin Cake
    • Overhead view of a white chocolate raspberry bundt cake with white chocolate buttercream frosting and fresh raspberries with a slice cut out and on its side
      White Chocolate Raspberry Bundt Cake
    Close up side view of carrot cake

    Single Layer Carrot Cake (No Nuts)

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    This single-layer carrot cake is moist and flavorful, with a perfect blend of spices and grated carrots. Topped with a smooth cream cheese frosting, it's an indulgent dessert that's perfect for any special occasion.
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 50 minutes mins
    Frosting 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 25 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 24

    Equipment

    • 1 Grater or food processor

    Ingredients
      

    Carrot Cake

    • 2 cups all-purpose flour
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
    • 2 teaspoons baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 2 cups white sugar
    • 1 ½ cups vegetable oil
    • 4 eggs
    • 3 cups grated carrots

    Cream Cheese Frosting

    • 8 tablespoons salted butter softened
    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 4 cups powdered sugar
    • ½ tablespoon vanilla optional*
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt optional**

    Instructions
     

    Making the carrot cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350℉ and spray a 9x13 cake pan with cooking spray.
    • Add the all-purpose flour, baking soda, cinnamon and salt to a mixing bowl and mix well.
    • Add the white sugar and oil to the mixing bowl and mix on low until integrated.
    • Add the eggs, one at a time, and mix on low until integrated.
    • Add the shredded carrots and stir or mix on low until they are evenly distributed.
    • Pour the cake batter into sprayed 9x13 baking pan. Bake at 350℉ for about 50 minutes or until a toothpick in the center comes out clean. Allow the cake to fully cool before frosting.

    Making the frosting

    • Put the softened cream cheese and softened salted butter in to a mixing bowl and mix on medium until thoroughly combined and fluffy with no lumps remaining.
    • Add 3 cups of the powdered sugar, and the salt and the vanilla (if using) to the mixing bowl and mix until integrated. Scrape down the sides. Add the last cup of powdered sugar and mix on medium high to high until light and fluffy, approximately 5-7 minutes. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl halfway through.
    • Apply the frosting to the cooled cake with a piping bag, offset icing spatula or a regular knife.

    Notes

    *The vanilla in the cream cheese frosting is optional. It gives the frosting a nice hint of flavor, but regular brown vanilla does tint the frosting so keep that in mind. 
    **The salt in the frosting is also optional. Frosting can be very sweet, so the added salt and salted butter helps to cut the sweetness of the frosting. 

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Carrot Cake
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Overhead photo of slice of carrot cake on a plate in front of a baking pan of carrot cake

    Hot Honey Roasted Carrots

    April 1, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

    Sweet, spicy, and stunning! These hot honey roasted rainbow carrots are roasted to perfection, bringing out the natural sweetness and vibrant colors of the carrots. Roasted with a chili-infused honey glaze, they're the perfect sweet and spicy side dish to brighten up any meal!

    Chopped hot honey roasted carrots on a serving platter with parsley garnish

    I confess that I haven't always liked cooked carrots. I remember them as mushy, flavorless and too sweet. But when my aunt told me that she uses my bread dipping seasoning, olive oil and honey on her cooked carrots, it really got me thinking about cooked carrots. And then I started making my own. And guess what? I don't just like roasted carrots, I love them. (In fact, I love them so much that I was eating them with my fingers while taking the photos for this blog post. A big no-no on so many levels, mostly for my camera's sake, but these are that good!) Roasting brings out some of the natural sweetness of carrots. And these are tossed with a small amount hot chili-infused honey. The hot honey adds a little more sweetness but with a sidekick of spice for a more balanced sweet and spicy flavor. So good!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Ingredients need for Hot Honey Roasted Carrots: carrots, hot honey, olive oil and salt as well. Also included are optional ingredients of green onions, bread dipping seasoning and fresh parsley
    • Fresh carrots
    • Hot honey
    • Olive oil
    • Salt
    • Green onions (optional)
    • Bread dipping seasoning or Italian seasoning (optional)
    • Fresh parsley (optional)

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Substitutions

    • Vegan - to make this recipe vegan, you can substitute maple syrup and a dash of cayenne pepper for the hot honey.
    • Hot honey - if you don't want to use spicy, hot honey, you can substitute regular honey.
    • Bread dipping seasoning - you can substitute regular Italian seasoning for the bread dipping seasoning or also skip it all together. It's optional.
    • Rainbow carrots - rainbow carrots are fun, but they taste almost exactly like regular carrots so you can substitute regular carrots for the rainbow carrots. You can also use baby rainbow or regular carrots, but I don't recommend doing that. Baby carrots are processed and don't have as much flavor as regular carrots. Peeling the carrots goes pretty quickly and full size carrots are usually cheaper pound for pound. Technically, you don't even have to peel the carrots, just wash them well.
    Two pounds of roasted full length rainbow carrots on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper

    Variations

    • Full carrots - if you are having a nice dinner or just want to be fancy, you can leave the carrots whole. You'll only need to trim them so that they fit on a plate. Some of my carrots were really long, so a few needed the ends snipped off.

    Storage

    Store the hot honey roasted rainbow carrots in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 to 5 days.

    roasted full length rainbow carrots on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper with the sun shinning partially on them

    Next Level Tips

    • If you buy fresh carrots with the carrot tops still on, save the carrot tops for your salads! Save the tops of the green onions too. Check out my how to build a salad post where using fresh herbs is one of the ingredients! Carrot tops can also be used as a parsley substitute. They are more earthy and bitter, but they are perfect for including in salads.
    • Definitely use fresh full carrots if you can, not baby carrots. Baby carrots are processed, are soaking in a water solution and are older than regular fresh carrots.
    • Double or triple the recipe for dinner parties or holiday gatherings!

    FAQ

    Do I have to peel my carrots?

    No! You can definitely skip the peeling step. However, make sure to wash your carrots very well if you are not peeling off the outer layer.

    What type of hot honey should I use?

    Mike's Hot Honey is probably the most well known brand. I have used both Mike's Hot Honey and Nate's Hot Honey. Both work well. I've also been seeing hot honey showing up at farmer's markets lately. Any chili infused, spicy hot honey will work.

    Chopped hot honey roasted carrots on a serving platter with parsley garnish

    Related

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    • Overhead view of no bake peanut butter balls on a plate
      No Bake Peanut Butter Oatmeal Balls
    • Overhead image of a stacked chocolate protein powder balls on a plate
      Chocolate Protein Powder Bites
    • Close up of an oatmeal breakfast cookie on a wire rack
      Oatmeal Breakfast Cookies
    • Overhead view of a bowl of split pea soup garnished with celery leaves and a spoon sticking out
      Split Pea Soup with Ham and Potatoes
    Close up overhead view of chopped hot honey roasted carrots on a serving platter with parsley garnish

    Hot Honey Roasted Carrots

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    Sweet, spicy, and beautifully caramelized, these hot honey roasted rainbow carrots highlight the natural sweetness and vibrant colors of the carrots. Roasted with a sweet, fiery honey glaze, they're the perfect bold and flavorful side dish for any meal!
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound carrots peeled
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ½ tablespoon hot honey
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ bunch green onions optional
    • ½ teaspoon bread dipping seasoning optional
    • 1 tablespoon parsley finely chopped optional

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 400℉ and line a baking sheet with parchment paper or a baking mat.
    • Mix the olive oil, hot honey and salt in a small bowl until it's fully combined.
    • Wash, peel and cut the carrots. I like to cut them into 3-4 inch long pieces or leave them full length. If the carrots are extra wide, cut them in half or quarters so that all the pieces are of somewhat similar size.
    • If you are using green onions, wash and cut them into the same lengths as the carrots. Set them aside.
    • Add the carrots to a large bowl. Drizzle the olive oil and hot honey mixture over the carrots and toss the carrots until all are fully coated. [If you are keeping the carrots full length, they are harder to toss. You can use your hands to fully coat the carrots.]
    • Put the coated carrots on the baking sheet in a single layer.
    • After the carrots are on the baking sheet, toss the green onions in the bowl with any leftover hot honey olive oil mixture and set aside. They will be added to the carrots halfway through the roasting time.
    • Bake for 20-25 minutes. Halfway through, remove the carrots from the oven and flip them. If you are using green onions, add them now and sprinkle the bread dipping seasoning over the vegetables. Check at 20 minutes and remove for a firmer texture or roast an additional 5 minutes for a softer texture. Carrots will continue to soften a bit after removed from the oven. Serve hot.

    Notes

    Double or triple the recipe for dinner parties or holiday gatherings! 

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Hot honey roasted carrots
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Close up view of chopped hot honey roasted carrots on a serving platter with parsley garnish

    GIANT PEANUT BUTTER COOKIES

    March 26, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

    Giant bakery-style peanut butter cookies are thick, chewy and packed with rich peanut butter flavor. They are also loaded with peanut butter chips for a soft, dense center that melts in your mouth, and they're baked until they have a slightly crisp exterior. These double peanut butter cookies are the perfect balance of chewiness, sweetness and nuttiness.

    Close up photo of giant peanut butter cookies randomly stacked on a cooling rack

    I loved my mom's peanut butter cookies when I was growing up. The ones with the little criss-cross fork marks or the ones with the chocolate candy kiss in the center. In fact, this is her recipe that I altered to add peanut butter chips and make them bakery style. Why is it even more satisfying to eat a giant bakery style cookie? I'm not sure, but I'll take one giant cookie over four smaller cookies any day. Especially when the giant cookie is soft, chewy and peanut buttery.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Photo of ingredients needed to make peanut butter cookies: peanut butter, salted butter, white sugar, brown sugar, an egg, all purpose flour, baking soda, baking powder, salt and peanut butter chips
    • Peanut butter
    • Salted butter
    • Brown sugar
    • White sugar
    • Egg
    • All purpose flour
    • Baking powder
    • Baking Soda
    • Salt
    • Peanut butter chips

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Instructions on how to shape the dough

    Overhead photo of 6 peanut butter cookie dough balls inside of 6 baking rings to prevent cookies from spreading

    Step 1: Roll dough into balls and place one ball in the center of each ring.

    Overhead view of six flattened peanut butter cookie dough balls inside of six bakery rings

    Step 2: Flatten the balls down into more of a hockey puck size.

    Use a kitchen scale to section off 12 equal pieces of dough. For the flour I use, that means the dough balls weigh roughly 2.2 ounces or 62 grams each. (If you don't have a kitchen scale, you can use a large 4 tablespoon cookie scoop that you use for cupcakes but pack it full). Then, roll the dough into a ball with your hands. Next, flatten the dough to the size of a hockey puck with the bottom of a measuring cup or regular cup. Flattening the dough a bit helps the cookies bake more evenly.

    Baking rings

    Baking rings (also known as english muffin, tart or burger rings) are used to keep the cookies in a nice round shape and from spreading too much. They are especially helpful for soft doughs like peanut butter cookie doughs. These rings are one of secrets to making amazing bakery style cookies at home!

    Equipment

    A stand or hand mixer is helpful for these double peanut butter cookies. Six 4-inch dessert or burger rings are strongly recommended.

    One giant peanut butter cookie on a white plate in front of more giant peanut butter cookies randomly stacked on a cooling rack

    Storage

    Store in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 5 days.

    Next Level Tips

    • Bakery rings are super helpful when baking giant soft cookies so that they don't spread too much. You can also use the bakery rings for baking tarts, English muffins, hamburger buns or shaping hamburgers. They're not expensive either.
    • Buy a cheap kitchen scale so you can weigh your ingredients, especially the flour.
    • Weigh your flour! Different flours have different weights. For all-purpose flour, I love Costco's organic all-purpose flour. On the back of the Costco organic all-purpose flour package, one serving equals ¼ cup and 30 grams. So if I need 1 and ¼ cups of flour for this recipe, I know it is 150 grams. If you use a different flour, then use the weight for 1 and ¼ cups of that brand. You can find the weight per serving on the nutrition label.
    • Weigh your cookie dough balls! Yes, you can use a 4 tablespoon large cookie scoop for this recipe. But, to get all your cookies the same size, it's best to weigh them. It's actually faster too once you get used it. So how do you do it? After you're done making the dough, weigh it. You can use ounces or grams. I like grams. Then take the weight of your dough and divide by 12. Then, make them all that size! For this recipe, it is roughly 62 grams or 2.2 ounces depending on the flour you use.
    Side view of 4 giant peanut butter cookies on a plate with more blurred cookies in the background

    FAQ

    What type of peanut butter should I use?

    While it may not be as healthy as all-natural peanut butter, regular processed peanut butter works best with these cookies.

    Do I have to chill the dough?

    It's highly recommended to chill soft cookie dough. It's not as highly critical when using the bakery rings, but it's still highly recommended.

    Do I need the dessert or burger rings to make these cookies?

    Yes, otherwise the cookies can spread too much.

    Close up photo of giant peanut butter cookies randomly stacked on a cooling rack

    Related

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    • Overhead view of a multi layer stack of browned butter chocolate chip bars on a serving plate
      Brown Butter Chocolate Chip Cookie Bars
    • Overhead photo of sour cream cookies with pink frosting and multicolored sprinkles stacked up on a multi colored plate
      Old Fashioned Sour Cream Cookies
    • Close up photo of stack of chewy ginger molasses cookies on a pedestal
      Chewy Ginger Molasses Cookies
    • Close up photo of teddy bear colored cookie dough sugar cookie on top of other colored
      Colored Cookie Dough Sugar Cookies
    Close up photo of giant peanut butter cookies randomly stacked on a cooling rack

    Giant Peanut Butter Cookies

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    These giant peanut butter cookies are thick, chewy, and bursting with rich peanut butter flavor. With a soft center, crunchy edges and extra peanut butter chips, they're the perfect sweet and nutty treat!
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 11 minutes mins
    Chill Time 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 26 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12

    Equipment

    • 1 Stand or hand mixer
    • 6-12 4-inch dessert or burger rings

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup peanut butter
    • ½ cup salted butter softened
    • ½ cup brown sugar
    • ½ cup white sugar
    • 1 egg
    • ¾ cup peanut butter chips

    Instructions
     

    • Add the all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt to a small bowl. Stir together and set aside.
    • Add the peanut butter and softened butter to a mixing bowl. Mix on medium until the butters are completely mixed and there are no umps.
    • Add the brown sugar and white sugar to the mixing bowl and mix on medium until incorporated.
    • Add the egg and mix on medium until the egg is incorporated.
    • Add the flour mixture slowly and mix just until incorporated.
    • Stir in the peanut butter chips until they are evenly distributed.
    • Cover the mixing bowl and chill in the refrigerator for 2-3 hours.
    • Preheat the oven to 350℉. Line the baking sheet(s) with parchment paper or a baking mat. Lightly spray the insides of the baking rings.
    • Use a kitchen scale to section off 12 equal pieces of dough that weigh roughly 2.2 ounces or 62 grams each. (Or use a large 4 tablespoon cookie scoop packed full.) Roll the dough into balls and place one ball in the center of each baking ring. Lightly flatten with the bottom of a measuring cup or regular cup until it's the shape of a hockey puck. I have 6 bakery rings, so I make 2 batches of these cookies.
    • Bake for 11-12 minutes until the bottoms are lightly browned. The tops will be extremely soft and look undercooked when you take them out of the oven. That's normal for peanut butter cookies. They will continue to set and develop a nice crackly top as they cool. (Bake 11 minutes for a softer cookie and 12 minutes for a cookie with a crispier bottom and sides.) DO NOT OVERBAKE!
    • If you are reusing the baking rings, allow the cookies to cool at least 10 minutes before removing the rings. Then, let the cookies cool on the baking sheet for an additional 10 minutes before moving the cookies.

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Giant Peanut Butter Cookies
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Overhead view of a broken peanut butter cookie on a white plate in front of more giant peanut butter cookies randomly stacked on a cooling rack

    Whipped Tofu with Truffle Garlic Bread

    March 24, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

    Whipped tofu with truffle garlic bread is a decadent yet light vegan appetizer that combines light tofu 'ricotta' with crispy, truffle garlic bread. The tofu is whipped to a smooth texture and served alongside crunchy garlic bread. The result is a delightful contrast of textures, perfectly complemented by rich umami flavors.

    Overhead photo of a bowl of whipped tofu surrounded by garlic bread and parsley sprigs

    I love whipped tofu. It's super easy to make, and it has a similar texture to whipped ricotta which makes it a perfect dairy-free vegan spread for crunchy truffle garlic toast. We make whipped tofu by blending firm tofu in a food processor until it becomes light and creamy. It's really that easy. Then truffle oil is layered throughout the whipped tofu and the garlic toast adding a rich, earthy umami flavor that takes this appetizer to the next level!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • Firm tofu
    • Nutritional yeast
    • Garlic powder
    • Salt
    • Truffle oil (or olive oil)
    • Plant-based butter
    • Garlic
    • Parsley (optional)
    • Baguette or bread of choice

    See recipe card for quantities.

    What is Nutritional Yeast?

    Nutritional yeast is a deactivated yeast that is most often sold as small flakes. It has a savory, nutty, cheesy flavor, so it's perfect for vegan dishes. Tofu doesn't have a strong flavor on its own, so the nutritional yeast gives the whipped tofu more of a cheesy flavor. Whipping tofu with nutritional yeast helps bring the flavor and texture similar to a whipped ricotta. But, it's actually even better!

    Bowl of whipped tofu garnished with finely shopped parsley next to pieces of garlic bread

    Substitutions

    • Truffle oil - if you don't have truffle oil, you can substitute olive oil or another favorite flavor of oil.
    • Garlic bread - you can skip the garlic bread and serve the whipped ricotta tofu with regular bread, crackers or veggies. Or use it as a spread for sandwiches and wraps.

    Equipment

    A food processor or blender is needed to whip the tofu.

    Storage

    Store any leftovers separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. Before serving, give the whipped tofu ricotta a stir if the texture has firmed up.

    Next Level Tips

    • Whipped tofu with truffle oil tastes amazing on garlic toast. But there are so many more uses too! You can use it as a dip for veggies, a spread for crackers, a pasta sauce, and as a condiment for roasted vegetables, wraps and sandwiches.
    • If you want to grill the garlic bread, grill it after the rest of the food is done. The grill adds that distinct smoky flavor that elevates your garlic bread to an even higher level. Also, the oven won't heat up the house in the summer.
    Pieces of garlic bread and a spoon topped with whipped tofu and chopped parsley on a grey plate

    FAQ

    Should I use white or black truffle oil?

    You can use either in this recipe. White truffle oil can sometimes be more peppery and garlicky while black truffle oil can be bolder and earthier. Both will work! There are also flavored truffle oil options out there that are infused with garlic, jalapeños and chilis. New flavors are available all the time.

    Why do we use firm tofu?

    We use drained, firm tofu as it creates a light, airy texture when whipped. Soft or silky tofu doesn't whip as well and can have a mushy texture.

    Related

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    • Overhead photo of a sauce cup filled with avocado aioli surrounded by French fries and a view of a partial burger topped with avocado aioli
      Easy Avocado Aioli
    • Overhead view of a bowl of Grand Marnier cranberry sauce garnished with orange slices and a cinnamon stick
      Grand Marnier Cranberry Sauce
    • Overhead view of a bowl of kimchi tofu stir fry with vegetables over rice with chopsticks on the side and a tiny bowl of sriracha in the background
      Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry with Veggies
    • Photo of salad on blue salad bowl. Salad is topped with tomatoes, red cabbage, turnips, carrots, micro greens, basil, pipits seeds, oil and lemon juice.
      How to Build a Salad
    Close up photo of a bowl of whipped tofu with shopped parsley garnish and a piece of garlic toast dipping into the bowl

    Whipped Tofu with Truffle Garlic Bread

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    Whipped Tofu with Truffle Garlic Bread combines airy, creamy tofu with crunchy garlic toast and layers of truffle oil. The creamy tofu has a cheesy, earthy flavor while the crisp garlic bread brings an umami flavor creating a perfect balance of textures and flavors.
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12

    Equipment

    • 1 food processor or blender

    Ingredients
      

    Whipped Tofu

    • 1 package firm tofu (16 ounces)
    • 1 tablespoon nutritional yeast
    • 1 teaspoon truffle oil
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder

    Garlic Bread

    • 1 baguette (or bread of choice)
    • 2 tablespoons plant-based butter
    • 2 garlic cloves minced
    • 1 teaspoon truffle oil
    • salt to taste

    Optional Garnish

    • fresh parsley chopped
    • ½ teaspoon truffle oil

    Instructions
     

    Press and whip the tofu

    • While removing the tofu from the package, drain any excess liquid. Wrap the tofu in a clean tea towel or layers of paper towel and place on a plate. Place another plate on top and add weight on top (like a can of tomatoes or beans) of the plate to press the tofu. Leave for 30 minutes.
    • Add the pressed tofu, nutritional yeast, truffle oil, garlic powder and salt to a food processor. Blend until light and airy, 30 to 60 seconds. Don't over-blend.
    • Add the whipped tofu to a bowl and serve.
    • Optional: add finely chopped parsley and drizzle ½ teaspoon truffle oil on top of the whipped tofu for garnish.

    Make a garlic bread

    • Preheat the oven to broil. Or turn the grill to medium high heat.
    • Cut a baguette (or bread of choice) into 8-12 pieces and set aside.
    • Melt 2 tablespoons of plant-based butter in the microwave for 15-30 seconds. Add the minced garlic and 1 teaspoon of truffle oil to the melted butter.
    • With a pastry brush or a small spatula, spread the melted garlic truffle butter on to each piece of bread
    • Place the bread on a baking sheet with the buttered side up and broil until the edges are browned to taste (approximately 2 minutes). [Grilling takes a similar amount of time. To grill, place the bread on the grill with the buttered side down and check for grill marks after 1 minute. If grill marks are well defined on the garlic bread, remove it from the grill. If not, grill for one additional minute and check again.]
    • Finish the garlic bread with a light dusting of salt from a salt shaker. Serve with the whipped tofu.

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Truffle Garlic Bread, Whipped Tofu
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Baileys Irish Cream Cupcakes

    March 14, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker Leave a Comment

    Baileys Irish Cream Cupcakes are rich, moist chocolate cupcakes infused with smooth and creamy Baileys Irish Cream liqueur. The Baileys cupcakes are then topped with a velvety, sweet Baileys buttercream frosting and chocolate shavings. It all comes together to create a delicious boozy dessert that's perfect for St. Patrick's Day or any special occasion.

    Many chocolate Baileys Irish Cream cupcakes with Baileys buttercream frosting on a cake plate with a mini bottle of Baileys Irish Cream in the midst of the cupcakes

    Boozy cupcakes are always fun especially when you can match them to a holiday. And these Baileys Cupcakes are fabulous for St. Patrick's Day. I'm part Irish, Irish Cream is Irish and so is St. Patrick's Day. And while St. Patrick's Day has been around a lot longer than Irish Cream, why not celebrate St. Patrick's Day with a little Irish Cream? It's super smooth and awesome for adding to desserts especially desserts with a little chocolate. Therefore, chocolate Baileys cupcakes are perfect for any St. Patrick's Day celebrations. See the logic there? Yes! But, these are so yummy that you'll want to make them during the rest of the year too.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients for chocolate Baileys cupcakes

    Ingredients needed to make chocolate Baileys Irish Cream cupcakes: cake flour, cocoa powder, baking soda, salt, salted butter, white sugar, eggs, buttermilk and Baileys Irish Cream
    • Cake flour
    • Cocoa powder
    • Baking soda
    • Salt
    • White sugar
    • Salted butter
    • Eggs
    • Buttermilk
    • Baileys Irish Cream

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Ingredients for Baileys buttercream

    Ingredients needed to make Baileys buttercream: Salted butter, powdered sugar and Baileys Irish Cream with optional ingredients of heavy whipping cream and a semi-sweet chocolate bar for decorating the cupcakes
    • Salted butter
    • Powdered sugar
    • Baileys Irish Cream
    • Heavy whipping cream (optional)
    • Semi sweet chocolate bar for chocolate shavings (optional)

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Instructions for brushing Baileys on the cupcakes

    Step 1: Pour 3 tablespoons of Baileys into a small bowl. While the cupcakes are still warm, use a pastry brush to brush the tops of the cupcakes with the Baileys. Let the Baileys soak in and repeat again for each cupcake.

    Variations

    • Baileys - try your favorite Baileys flavor. It doesn't have to be the regular Irish Cream flavor. You can use another brand of Irish Cream. Kavanagh brand is highly recommended too.
    One chocolate Baileys Irish Cream cupcake with Baileys buttercream frosting in front of another cupcake and a small bottle of Baileys Irish Cream

    Storage

    Store the cupcakes with Baileys in an airtight container at room temperature or in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.

    Next Level Tips

    • Use a high quality cocoa powder. Like I mentioned in my Chocolate Sweet Rolls recipe, my very favorite cocoa powder is the Valrhona brand which can be found on Amazon and at Whole Foods among other places. After Valrhona, I'd recommend Guittard or Ghirardelli brands which can be found in regular grocery stores.
    • For buttercream frosting, my favorite piping tips for frosting are the Wilton 1A for a round tip and a Wilton (or Ateco) 1M for a star tip. If you only have two piping tips, these are the two to own!
    • Instead of disposable piping bags, I recommend reusable piping bags. They're easy to wash, you won't unexpectedly run out and it's less waste going to the landfill.
    • Don't limit yourself to making these Baileys cupcakes on St. Patrick's Day. They're great for any time of the year.
    • We brush Baileys on to the warm, baked cupcakes as that retains more of the alcohol flavor than baking the Baileys inside the cupcakes. Alcohol can have a drying effect when baked inside of baked goods too.
    45 degree overhead front view of a chocolate Baileys Irish Cream cupcake with Baileys buttercream frosting on a cake plate in the midst of partial view of other Baileys cupcakes

    FAQ

    Can I make these Baileys cupcakes ahead of time?

    Yes. And if you are making a lot of cupcakes (many times I've made hundreds in a day), I highly recommend baking the base cupcakes the day before and then frosting the cupcakes the day you will be eating them.

    What kind of chocolate works best for chocolate shavings?

    Semi sweet chocolate in the 50-65 percent range works best for chocolate shavings. Milk chocolate is too soft and very dark chocolate is too hard and won't shave nicely. You may need to press hard with the peeler or chocolate shaver.

    Three Baileys cupcakes with Baileys buttercream frosting on a gray plate. One cupcake has a bite taken out.

    Related

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    • Close up photo of a corner of a dessert board made with brownie bites, lemon bars, chocolate chip cookies, macarons, mocha latte pretzels, Belgian waffles, chocolate covered almonds and strawberries
      How to Make a Dessert Board
    • Close up view of zucchini cupcakes with cinnamon cream cheese frosting on a cooling rack
      Zucchini Cupcakes with Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting
    • Cut peanut butter fudge squares topped with salt flakes on parchment paper
      Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk
    • Overhead view of a pistachio cheesecake topped with whipped heavy cream and pistachio crumbs
      Pistachio Cheesecake
    One chocolate Baileys Irish Cream cupcake with Baileys buttercream frosting in front of another cupcake and a mini bottle of Baileys Irish Cream

    Baileys Irish Cream Cupcakes

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    Baileys Irish Cream Cupcakes are rich, moist chocolate treats infused with the smooth flavor of Baileys Irish Cream liqueur. Topped with a creamy Baileys buttercream frosting and chocolate shavings, they're the perfect boozy dessert for St. Patrick's Day or any special occasion.
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Decorating Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 48 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 20

    Equipment

    • 1 Stand or hand mixer

    Ingredients
      

    Cupcake base

    • 1 ½ cups cake flour
    • ½ cup cocoa flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 ¼ cups white sugar
    • 10 tablespoons salted butter
    • 3 eggs room temperature
    • 1 ⅓ cup buttermilk room temperature
    • 3 tablespoons Baileys Irish Cream for cupcake tops

    Frosting

    • 8 tablespoons salted butter room temperature
    • 4 cups powdered sugar
    • 3-4 tablespoons Baileys Irish Cream
    • 1 tablespoon heavy whipping cream optional
    • 1 semi sweet chocolate bar for shaving optional

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat oven to 350℉. Line two 12-cup or one 24-cup muffin pans with cupcake liners.

    Cupcake base

    • Add the cake flour, cocoa powder, baking soda and salt to a small bowl. Mix well and set aside.
    • Add the butter and sugar to the mixing bowl. Mix on low until fully incorporated.
    • Add the eggs, one at a time, to the mixing bowl. Mix on low until incorporated.
    • Alternate adding half of the flour mix and half of the buttermilk. Mix on low until incorporated.
    • Use a large 4 tablespoon cookie scoop to fill each muffin tin.
    • Bake for 18-19 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean. [If you are using two 12 cup muffin pans on different oven racks, rotate pans halfway through.]
    • Let the cupcakes cool for 5-10 minutes. Pour the Bailey's Irish Cream into a small bowl. With a pastry brush, lightly brush the tops of each cupcake with the Baileys. Brush each cupcake twice. Move the cupcakes to a cooling rack to cool completely.

    Frosting

    • Add the room temperautre butter to a mixing bowl and mix on medium speed until creamy, about 1-2 minutes.
    • Add the powdered sugar and three tablespoons of Baileys to the mixing bowl. Mix on medium high until light and fluffy, scraping down the sides several times, about 7-8 minutes. [Depending on the temperature of the butter and the humidity of the kitchen, you may need to add an additional tablespoon of Baileys or heavy cream if the frosting is too heavy/thick.]
    • Add the frosting to the cupcakes by using an icing (offset) spatula, a regular knife or by piping it on.
    • Optional: top with chocolate shavings. To make chocolate shavings, use a vegetable peeler or a chocolate shaver to peel small pieces off the side of a semi sweet chocolate bar. (Handle the shavings minimally and quickly to avoid melting.)

    Notes

    Yields 20-24 cupcakes.

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Baileys Irish Cream Cupcakes
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Close up photo of a Baileys cupcake with Baileys buttercream frosting with a bite taken out in front of two other cupcakes on a gray plate

    Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake

    March 12, 2025 by Tracy @ Next Level Baker 3 Comments

    Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake combines the warm cinnamon and caramelized sugar flavors of speculoos cookie butter and Biscoff cookies with the creaminess of a cheesecake. It's the perfect blend of richness and warm spices on a crisp crust made with Biscoff cookies.

    Side view of undecorated Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake

    My first experience with speculoos cookies was love at first bite. When we lived in Europe, they would often serve a little treat on the side of your coffee orders. A lot of times, it was a little biscotti or a speculoos cookie. Perfect for dunking if you're the dunking type! I'm not, but I still loved the little treat. This Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake, it perfectly blends that familiar crunchy Biscoff cookie with a creamy cookie butter cheesecake filling. Crunchy and creamy. Warm and sweet. Old memories and new memories. All the best combinations.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake: Biscoff cookies, salted butter, white sugar, cream cheese, eggs and cookie butter
    • Biscoff cookies
    • Cookie butter
    • Cream cheese
    • White sugar
    • Eggs
    • Salted butter

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Overhead view of partial Biscoff Cookie Butter cheesecake decorated with cookie butter drizzle and crumbled Biscoff cookies

    HOW TO BAKE A CHEESECAKE WITHOUT CRACKS

    Okay, let's get to one of the biggest issues with cheesecakes: unsightly cracks. Cracks don't make the cheesecake taste any differently and, of course, they could be covered up. But, there are two main things to know to avoid cracks: baking temperature and water baths.

    BAKE AT A LOWER TEMPERATURE

    For temperature, cheesecakes turn out best when baked at a lower temperature. For that reason, I bake almost all of my cheesecakes, including this one, at 325 degrees.

    USE THE MOAT METHOD FOR THE WATER BATH

    The most basic way to do a water bath is to wrap the springform pan with aluminum foil and place it in a roasting pan with water and then hope it doesn't leak. But, have you ever wrapped it super carefully with the extra wide aluminum foil only to discover that it still leaked? Yes, me too. Instead, I use the moat method. To use the moat method, place your 8 or 9 inch springform pan inside a 10 inch cake pan. Then place the 10 inch cake pan into a larger roasting pan with water. With this moat method, there is no possible way that water gets in to your springform pan. I've never had a cheesecake crack when I've combining lower baking temperature with the moat method.

    STEAM BATHS

    Ok, say you don't have a roasting pan big enough to fit your springform pan and cake pan. You can do the steam bath method, which usually works. I say usually because it's not quite as foolproof as the moat method. But, you can fill a 9x13 pan with one inch of water and place it on the oven rack directly beneath the springform pan. (If you have a cake pan, you can still put the springform pan in a cake pan according to the above moat method.) The water in the pan creates steam and a humid environment in the oven which helps to prevent cracks.

    Instructions for Moat Method

    Step 1: Fill the roasting pan with one inch of water. Place the springform pan inside of a cake pan and then place the cake pan in the roasting pan.

    Variations

    • Decorations - there are many, many ways to decorate a cheesecake. I love drizzle, and cookie butter works like a charm for drizzling. All you have to do is slightly heat it in the microwave, and it's super easy to drizzle with a spoon, piping bag, or decorator bottle. You can do straight lines of drizzle back and forth across the top. Or use a more random design like I did for my Thin Mints Cheesecake. You can add a whipped cream topping. Extra full cookies on top. No cookies on top. So many options!

    Equipment

    To make the best cheesecakes, a stand up mixer or hand mixer is needed. Also, a springform pan is needed to take the cheesecake out of the pan. A roasting pan is also helpful. However, if you don't have a roasting pan big enough for the moat method, you can fill a 9x13 pan with an inch or two of water to create a steam bath instead.

    Side view of partial Biscoff Cookie Butter cheesecake decorated with drizzled cookie butter and crumbled cookies

    Storage

    Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 to 7 days.

    Next Level Tips

    • Always use room temperature cream cheese and room temperature eggs for cheesecakes. 
    • The very best way to avoid cheesecake cracks is to bake at a lower temperature and use the moat method, as described above and in the FAQ section. In short, this is where you place your springform pan inside of a cake pan and then put the cake pan in a roasting pan with water. This avoids leaky aluminum foil yet still doesn't allow direct heat on the springform pan.
    • Allow the cheesecake to cool in the oven without touching it for two hours. Then move the springform pan to a cooling rack and allow the cheesecake to come to room temperature before placing it in the refrigerator.
    • Cheesecake needs time to set in the refrigerator after baking. Refrigerate for at least 6-8 hours; however, overnight is best.
    • I love to use offset or artsy designs on the tops of cheesecakes. If you like a dead-center kind of centerpiece or a ring of whipping cream swirls around the edges, go for it. I've done lots and lots of those. Currently, I go for more of an artsy look. The best part about art is that it's meant to be imperfect. Have fun and don't worry about any mess ups!
    • Love cookie butter? Also try my cookie butter cinnamon rolls!
    Grey plate with a fork,  full Biscoff cookies, and a slice of Biscoff cookie butter cheesecake with a bite taken out with the rest of the cheesecake behind it

    FAQ

    Do I need to use room temperature cream cheese and eggs?

    Yes! However, you can carefully speed up this process if you forgot to set out the cream cheese and eggs. Most microwaves now have a soften option. You can carefully soften the cream cheese in the microwave to room temperature but not melted. For the eggs, you can place them from the refrigerator into a bowl of warm (not hot) water to quicken up the process for the eggs. However, I do recommend letting the cream cheese and eggs come to room temperature naturally on the counter. Unless you're in a pinch, of course. We've all been there!

    What's the best way to remove the bottom of a springform pan?

    The reason we pack the crust tightly, but not too tightly, into the springform pan is so that we can easily remove the bottom of the springform pan without the crust crumbling. After the rim of the springform pan is off, take a cake lifter (or metal pizza peel or a very large spatula) and gently slide it in between cheesecake crust and bottom of springform pan. Don't lift the cheesecake up in the air. Instead, use the cake lifter to slide the cheesecake sideways off of the springform bottom onto a serving plate or a round cardboard cake board. You can buy a cheap cake lifter on Amazon or at a Hobby Lobby type store in the baking section. If you're using a large metal spatula, run it under the entire outer edge first before using it to gently slide the cheesecake.

    What is the moat method?

    The moat method creates a barrier between the springform pan and the direct heat of the oven. Kind of like in the olden days when castles used moats to protect the castles from invaders! So, in the moat method, we place the springform pan into a larger cake pan before putting the cake pan into a larger roasting pan with the water bath. There ends up being a moat (of air) that separates the springform pan from the cake pan and the water bath. I highly recommend doing it this way as it works great.

    Do I need to par-bake the crust?

    Par-baking the crust is optional but highly recommended. Par-baking the crust doesn't take very long and it helps maintain a crisp crust for your cheesecake.

    What kind of cookie butter should I use?

    I recommend either Trader Joe's brand of Speculoos cookie butter spread or Lotus brand of creamy Biscoff cookie butter. Both will work well.

    Related

    Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

    • Close up photo of Thin Mints cheesecake topped with chocolate drizzle, crumbled Thin Mints and two full Thin Mints
      Thin Mints Cheesecake
    • Overhead view of partial Samoas cheesecake topped with chocolate, toasted coconut and Samoas cookies
      Samoas Cheesecake
    Front 45 degree view of a whole Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake
    Overhead photo of whole Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake

    Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake

    Tracy @ Next Level Baker
    Biscoff cookie butter cheesecake is a rich, creamy cheesecake infused with the irresistible flavor of cookie butter. The buttery Biscoff crust adds the perfect crunch, balancing the creaminess of the cheesecake. Topped with cookie butter drizzle and crumbled Biscoff cookies, every bite is pure indulgence.
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Cooling and Chill Time 10 hours hrs
    Total Time 11 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12

    Equipment

    • 1 Stand or hand mixer
    • 1 8 or 9 inch springform pan
    • 1 10 inch cake pan optional
    • 1 roasting pan optional

    Ingredients
      

    Crust

    • 1 package Biscoff cookies (8.8 ounces) Reserve 6 cookies for decorating
    • 2 tablespoons white sugar
    • 5 tablespoons salted butter melted

    Filling

    • 4 cream cheese blocks (8 ounces each) room temperature
    • 1 cup white sugar
    • 4 eggs room temperature
    • ½ cup cookie butter

    Topping (optional)

    • ½ cup cookie butter
    • 6 Biscoff cookies reserved from crust

    Instructions
     

    Making the crust

    • Preheat oven to 325°. Spray an 8 or 9 inch springform pan, including the sides, with cooking spray and set aside.
    • Set aside 6 Biscoff cookies for decorating. Put the other 26 cookies in a food processor and grind the cookies into small crumbs. [It's okay to have some bigger pieces of cookies as the grind doesn't need to be super fine.]
    • Mix the cookie crumbs, melted butter and 2 tablespoons of white sugar together in a medium bowl until well combined.
    • Add the crust mixture to the springform pan. Pat down flat with hands or a flat measuring cup with medium pressure. It should be packed firmly but not too hard.
    • Bake the crust for 6 minutes and set aside to cool. [This step is optional but highly recommended for a crisp crust.]

    Making the filling

    • Place the room temperature cream cheese into the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until creamy and all lumps are gone. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
    • Add the cookie butter to the cream cheese in the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until well combined. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl as needed.
    • Add the white sugar to the cream cheese mixture in the mixing bowl and mix on low speed until well combined. Scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.
    • Next, add the eggs one at a time. Mix on low speed just until each egg is combined before adding the next egg. Between eggs, scrape down the sides of the mixing bowl.

    Baking and cooling the cheesecake

    • Pour the filling into the crust in the springform pan. Place the springform pan in a larger cake pan (or cover the sides of the springform pan with aluminum foil). Fill the roasting pan with one inch of water to create the water bath. Carefully add the cake pan (or the wrapped springform pan) into the water. [See FAQ or post description on why the moat method is preferred.]
    • Bake at 325° for about 60 minutes until the center is mostly set. Then, turn off the oven and open the oven door to start cooling. Leave it alone for two hours. After two hours, remove the cake pan (or wrapped springform pan) from the oven and the water bath and let cool on a cooling rack until room temperature.
    • Before placing in the refrigerator, run a knife around the edges to loosen the cheesecake from the sides. Cover and refrigerate a minimum of 8 hours but preferably overnight.
    • After 8 hours, or preferably the next day, remove the rim. Also, remove the cheesecake from the bottom of the springform pan (see FAQ if needed) if so desired and decorate the cheesecake.

    Topping the cheesecake (optional)

    • Warm the cookie butter in the microwave for 15 to 30 seconds until the cookie butter is pourable but still holds its shape. Use a spoon, piping bag or a decorator bottle to drizzle the cookie butter across the cheesecake in any pattern. You can also spread on the pourable cookie butter with a knife. Crumble the reserved cookies and add them on top. You can also create a pooled spot of drizzle to secure full cookies as shown in the photos.

    Would you like to save this?

    We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later!

    Don't worry! We won't spam you!

    Keyword Biscoff Cookie Butter Cheesecake
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Overhead partial view of Biscoff Cookie Butter cheesecake with a piece cut out of it
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • 2
    • 3
    • 4
    • Next Page »

    Hi, I'm Tracy! I'm a baker, photographer and writer who specializes in desserts for special occasions as well as everyday healthy recipes. I'm so happy you're here! More about me

    Favorites

    • Overhead view of dried spices for ranch seasoning mix in lines on a cutting board: parsley, minced onion, dill, onion powder, chives, garlic powder, salt and pepper with a measuring spoon on top and one to the side
      Dairy Free Ranch Seasoning Mix
    • Overhead photo if pasta pesto with sun dried tomatoes on a plate with a napkin and silverware to the side
      Pesto Pasta with Sun Dried Tomatoes
    • Close up side view of a cut grilled ham and cheese sandwich
      Grilled Ham and Cheese Sandwich
    • Overhead photo of rigatoni with shrimp and tomato butter sauce on a blue polish pottery plate
      Shrimp Rigatoni with Tomato Butter Sauce

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and updates

    Contact

    • Contact
    • Work with me
    • FAQ

    Copyright © 2025 Next Level Baker